diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h.zip | bin | 753236 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/52130-h.htm | 4576 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 74645 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/i002.jpg | bin | 74873 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/i023.jpg | bin | 74144 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/i035.jpg | bin | 73961 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/i051.jpg | bin | 75208 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/i067.jpg | bin | 74929 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/i085.jpg | bin | 74868 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/i097.jpg | bin | 75258 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/i111.jpg | bin | 74802 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130-h/images/logo.jpg | bin | 11673 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130.txt | 4464 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/52130.zip | bin | 64102 -> 0 bytes |
17 files changed, 17 insertions, 9040 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..12f6872 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #52130 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/52130) diff --git a/old/52130-h.zip b/old/52130-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2055ea2..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/52130-h.htm b/old/52130-h/52130-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 94d4036..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/52130-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4576 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> -<head> -<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" /> -<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Fairview Boys at Camp Mystery, by Frederick Gordon</title> - <style type="text/css"> - - p { margin-top: .75em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: .75em; - } - - p.bold {text-align: center; font-weight: bold;} - p.bold2 {text-align: center; font-weight: bold; font-size: 150%;} - - h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { - text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ - clear: both; - } - h1 span, h2 span { display: block; text-align: center; } - #id1 { font-size: smaller } - - - hr { - width: 33%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 33.5%; - margin-right: 33.5%; - clear: both; - } - - hr.smler { - width: 10%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 45%; - margin-right: 45%; - clear: both; - } - - body{margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - } - - table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto; padding: 5px; border-collapse: collapse; border: none; text-align: right;} - - .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ - /* visibility: hidden; */ - position: absolute; - left: 92%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; - text-indent: 0px; - } /* page numbers */ - - .center {text-align: center;} - .smaller {font-size: smaller;} - .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - .box {max-width: 20em; margin: 1.5em auto; border: 4px black solid; padding: 10px;} - .space-above {margin-top: 3em;} - .right {text-align: right;} - .left {text-align: left;} - - hr.full { width: 100%; - margin-top: 3em; - margin-bottom: 0em; - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; - height: 4px; - border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */ - border-style: solid; - border-color: #000000; - clear: both; } - </style> -</head> -<body> -<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, Fairview Boys at Camp Mystery, by Frederick -Gordon, Illustrated by R. Menel</h1> -<p>This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States -and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no -restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it -under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this -eBook or online at <a -href="http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you are not -located in the United States, you'll have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this ebook.</p> -<p>Title: Fairview Boys at Camp Mystery</p> -<p> or, the Old Hermit and His Secret</p> -<p>Author: Frederick Gordon</p> -<p>Release Date: May 22, 2016 [eBook #52130]</p> -<p>Language: English</p> -<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p> -<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP MYSTERY***</p> -<p> </p> -<h4>E-text prepared by Martin Pettit<br /> - and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br /> - (<a href="http://www.pgdp.net">http://www.pgdp.net</a>)<br /> - from page images generously made available by<br /> - Internet Archive<br /> - (<a href="https://archive.org">https://archive.org</a>)</h4> -<p> </p> -<table border="0" style="background-color: #ccccff;margin: 0 auto;" cellpadding="10"> - <tr> - <td valign="top"> - Note: - </td> - <td> - Images of the original pages are available through - Internet Archive. See - <a href="https://archive.org/details/fairviewboysatca00gord"> - https://archive.org/details/fairviewboysatca00gord</a> - </td> - </tr> -</table> -<p> </p> -<hr class="full" /> -<p> </p> -<p> </p> -<p> </p> - -<div class="center"><a name="cover.jpg" id="cover.jpg"></a><img src="images/cover.jpg" alt="cover" /></div> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</a></span></p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i002.jpg" alt="What's the matter? cried the hunter" /></div> - -<p class="bold">"What's the matter?" cried the hunter.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span></p> - -<h1>FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP<br />MYSTERY</h1> - -<p class="bold">OR</p> - -<p class="bold">THE OLD HERMIT AND HIS SECRET</p> - -<p class="bold space-above">BY</p> - -<p class="bold2">FREDERICK GORDON</p> - -<p class="bold">AUTHOR OF "FAIRVIEW BOYS AFLOAT AND ASHORE," "FAIRVIEW BOYS ON<br /> -EAGLE MOUNTAIN," "FAIRVIEW BOYS AND THEIR RIVALS," ETC.</p> - -<p class="bold space-above"><i>ILLUSTRATED</i></p> - -<p class="bold space-above">CHARLES E. GRAHAM & CO.<br /> -NEWARK, N. J. —— NEW YORK</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span></p> - -<div class="box"> -<h2>BOOKS FOR BOYS</h2> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<p class="bold"><span class="smcap">By</span> FREDERICK GORDON</p> - -<p class="bold2">FAIRVIEW BOYS SERIES</p> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<p class="bold">Illustrated. Price, per volume,<br />75 cents, postpaid.</p> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<p>FAIRVIEW BOYS AFLOAT AND ASHORE<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, The Young Crusoes of Pine Island</span><br /> -<br /> -FAIRVIEW BOYS ON EAGLE MOUNTAIN<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, Sammy Brown's Treasure Hunt</span><br /> -<br /> -FAIRVIEW BOYS AND THEIR RIVALS<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, Bob Bouncer's Schooldays</span><br /> -<br /> -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP MYSTERY<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, The Old Hermit and His Secret</span><br /> -<br /> -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE<br /> -<span style="margin-left: 3em;">Or, Carried Out to Sea</span></p></div> - -<p class="center"><span class="smcap">Copyright, 1914, by</span></p> - -<p class="center">GRAHAM & MATLACK</p> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<p class="center"><i>Fairview Boys At Camp Mystery</i></p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span></p> - -<h2>CONTENTS</h2> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<table summary="CONTENTS"> - <tr> - <td colspan="2" class="left"><span class="smaller">CHAPTER</span></td> - <td><span class="smaller">PAGE</span></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>I.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">The Earthquake</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_7">7</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>II.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">The First Snow</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_14">14</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>III.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Sammy Has an Idea</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_22">22</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>IV.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">A Queer Sight</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_31">31</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>V.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Winter Fun</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_40">40</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>VI.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">A Fine Chance</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_48">48</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>VII.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">At Camp Mystery</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_56">56</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>VIII.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">The Old Mansion</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_62">62</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>IX.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Sammy's Queer Find</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_70">70</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>X.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">The Mysterious Room</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_77">77</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XI.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">The Strange Hermit</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_84">84</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XII.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Into the Drift</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_93">93</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XIII.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">Helping the Hermit</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_101">101</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XIV.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">The Boiling Spring</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_109">109</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td>XV.</td> - <td class="left"> <span class="smcap">End of Camp Mystery</span></td> - <td><a href="#Page_119">119</a></td> - </tr> -</table> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span></p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/logo.jpg" alt="logo" /></div> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span></p> - -<p class="bold2">Fairview Boys at Camp Mystery</p> - -<hr class="smler" /> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER I</span> <span class="smaller">THE EARTHQUAKE</span></h2> - -<p>"There's Jed Burr!"</p> - -<p>"Coming back to school; eh? Then he can't be suspended any more."</p> - -<p>"No, he isn't. But I wish he was. There's sure to be a lot of trouble -now, and I was thinking how much more fun we could have with him away."</p> - -<p>Three boys stood talking together in the school yard, where many -children were waiting for the final bell to ring to call them to their -studies. The three boys were looking at a larger lad, who was walking -slowly along the gravel path.</p> - -<p>"He looks to be the same bully as ever," said Bob Bouncer, one of the -three boys.</p> - -<p>"I guess he is, too," added Frank Haven. "Being suspended can't have -changed him much."</p> - -<p>"Well, if he tries any of his mean tricks on me," spoke Sammy Brown, "I -know what I'll do!"</p> - -<p>"What?" asked Frank, as he turned about to face the larger lad, so as to -be ready, in case of any sudden attack, of the kind for which Jed Burr -had a reputation. "What'll you do, Sammy?"</p> - -<p>"I'll have him arrested! I'm not going to stand for any more of his -games!"</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span></p><p>"I'm with you!" agreed Bob. "But maybe we could play a trick on him -first. He's played so many mean ones on us."</p> - -<p>"Now don't start anything," advised Frank, who was more quiet than -either of his two chums. "If we begin, the blame will be on us. We'll -let Jed alone if he lets us."</p> - -<p>"He doesn't seem to be going to do anything," added Sammy. "Maybe he's -going to behave better this term."</p> - -<p>"I hope so," returned Frank. "Well, let's go in. Doesn't our room look -dandy, since they fixed it up after the fire?"</p> - -<p>"I should say so!" cried Sammy. "And Miss Williams brought a fine lot of -pictures for the walls. It's more like the parlor at home than a -classroom."</p> - -<p>"Yes, and Miss Williams isn't like some teachers, either," went on -Frank. "She's as kind as can be."</p> - -<p>The three boys strolled toward the schoolhouse, which had opened for the -Fall term after some delay, caused by a fire. Now the building, in some -parts, was altogether new, and all the rooms had been redecorated and -painted. The structure had also been made larger.</p> - -<p>"Well, I'm glad, in some ways, that school's begun again," said Sammy. -"Though vacation was lots of fun."</p> - -<p>"Yes, we can have some good times in school," agreed Frank.</p> - -<p>"And there's that clubroom your father fixed up in the barn for us," put -in Sammy. "That sure was good of him, Frank. We can have fun there, if -we can't at school. And I'm going to do a lot of training in our club -gymnasium, too, this winter."</p> - -<p>"Huh! You train!" laughed Frank. "First we know you'll be off to the -mountains, looking for more buried treasure."</p> - -<p>"Aw, you're always casting that up!" grumbled Sammy.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span> "Still, you must -give Bob credit for finding your father's jewelry that the tramp hid -down in the schoolhouse well."</p> - -<p>"That's right," agreed Frank. "And you found miser Dolby's pocketbook. -Oh, say, look! There goes Jed into the principal's office! I guess -something must be going to happen."</p> - -<p>"I know all about it!" exclaimed a voice back of the three boys. They -turned quickly, to see Nellie Somers.</p> - -<p>"Tell us about it!" begged Sammy. He and his chums so much wanted to -know the story of the suspended boy coming back, that they did not mind -asking a girl about it.</p> - -<p>"Jed has promised to be a better boy," said Nellie, glad that she had a -chance to give some information. "The school board considered his case, -after he took the spelling list out of Miss Williams' desk, and said he -couldn't come back until he promised to be good. At first Jed wouldn't, -but he finally did, and he has to apologize to the whole school this -morning. Then he can be in his class again."</p> - -<p>"Oh ho!" cried Sammy. "So that's what makes Jed so quiet!"</p> - -<p>"No wonder he didn't try any tricks," added Frank.</p> - -<p>"He sure will feel mean to have to get up before the whole school," -added Bob Bouncer. "Come on in. It's almost time for the last bell."</p> - -<p>"Good-bye!" cried Nellie, as she ran on to join her girl friends.</p> - -<p>It was the first day of the new term, and there was more or less -confusion. And since it was the first day, no one wanted to be late. -Also the talk of Jed's apology had spread, and everyone wanted to see -what would happen.</p> - -<p>Into the school trooped the boys and girls, laughing and talking. Many -looked about to see the changes made since the fire. As Sammy, Frank and -Bob started up a short flight<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span> of steps to their room, they were -startled to hear a banging noise above them. They looked up, and saw -Johnnie Jones, one of the fattest little chaps in the school, start to -roll down. He had stumbled at the top step, and had fallen head over -heels.</p> - -<p>"Look out!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>"Hold fast!" advised Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Catch him!" called Frank, and this was the best advice of all. "Get -together," went on Frank to his chums, "and we'll hold him when he gets -here."</p> - -<p>They were now about half-way up the flight of steps, and, forming -themselves into a solid body, as though about to stop a rush in a -football game, they braced themselves to catch fat Johnnie.</p> - -<p>With a bump and a bounce he landed against them, and in another moment -Frank had set the little fellow on his feet again.</p> - -<p>"There you are, Johnnie!" said Frank, while Sammy and Bob brushed the -dust from his clothes. "You aren't hurt; are you?"</p> - -<p>Johnnie gasped once or twice, opened his mouth as though to howl, and -then, thinking better of it, closed his lips again.</p> - -<p>"No, I'm not hurt!" he said bravely.</p> - -<p>"He's too fat to get hurt!" laughed Bob. "You're like a rubber ball; -aren't you, Johnnie?"</p> - -<p>"I—I guess so," answered the little fellow, "but I don't want to bounce -down stairs again!"</p> - -<p>The three chums laughed at him as he started up the stairs once more, -and they kept close behind him, but he did not fall again.</p> - -<p>Into their classroom went Bob, Sammy and Frank. Other boys and girls -were already there, and more came in. Miss<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span> Williams was there to meet -them with a smile. She was a very pretty school-teacher, and her pupils -loved her.</p> - -<p>Soon the final bell rang, and then the children from the different rooms -marched into the one, big main hall, or auditorium, where the morning -exercises were held. There were many new pupils present this first day -of the term.</p> - -<p>There was singing, the reading of the Bible, and prayers, and then Mr. -Tetlow, the principal of the school, greeted those present. He spoke of -the fire, and what had happened at it, and mentioned the delay in -opening the school. He welcomed all who had now come, and said he hoped -they would all study hard to make up for lost time.</p> - -<p>"And now," went on the principal, "I have something not so pleasant to -say. But it has to be done, and it may be for the good of all of us. One -of our pupils was suspended last term for doing something wrong. We all -do wrong sometimes, but if we are sorry for it, and try not to do it -again, we should be forgiven.</p> - -<p>"And so I hope when you hear Jed Burr say that he is sorry, you will all -forgive him, and be friends with him again. Now Jed, let's get it over -with," and he smiled at the former bully, who sat in a front seat. The -principal wanted to make it as easy as he could for the lad.</p> - -<p>Jed was very red in the face as he shuffled up to the platform. He hung -down his head, and no one could doubt but that his punishment was hard. -He stood for a moment before all the school, getting very red in the -face.</p> - -<p>"Well," said Mr. Tetlow, kindly, "go on, Jed. Just a few words, to tell -us you are sorry."</p> - -<p>"I—I—er—I done wrong," stammered poor Jed, "and I'm sorry for it!"</p> - -<p>The principal stepped up beside him.</p> - -<p>"That is enough," he said. "You did very well, Jed. Now<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span> we will let -bygones be bygones. You may all go to your classes."</p> - -<p>Sammy, Bob and Frank, with the others, marched out. The little scene in -which Jed, their former enemy, had taken part, had made them do some -hard thinking. They were glad they had not been called on to stand up -and apologize to the whole school.</p> - -<p>Soon lessons were under way once more. Miss Williams gave a little talk -to the pupils in her room, explaining the new work that was to be taken -up that Fall and Winter.</p> - -<p>"It will be harder than that which you had before the fire," she said, -"but you know we have to go ahead in this world. It will not do to stand -still. I will help you all I can.</p> - -<p>"You will notice that I have hung some pictures on the walls. They are -to help you in your lessons, for it is sometimes easy to understand a -thing when we see a picture of it. I have other pictures to bring when -we need them."</p> - -<p>Sammy Brown suddenly thought of something. He raised his hand to show -that he wished to speak.</p> - -<p>"What is it?" asked Miss Williams.</p> - -<p>"We've got some pictures in our clubroom," said Sammy. "I could bring -them. There's a football game picture, and a lot of baseball players, -and a man hunting, and——"</p> - -<p>Sammy saw a smile on Miss Williams' face, and paused.</p> - -<p>"That's very nice of you, Sammy," she said, kindly, "and if we need that -sort of pictures you may bring them. But I'm afraid our lessons won't be -about baseball or football. You'll get enough of those games out of -school.</p> - -<p>"Now we will begin on the geography lesson. I want you to look at this -picture over here. It shows——"</p> - -<p>But Miss Williams did not say what the picture showed, for at that -moment there was a low, deep rumbling that seemed to go all through the -school. The building shook and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span> trembled. Then the rumble grew to a -roaring sound, and the building vibrated still more. The windows rattled -as if the glass would break.</p> - -<p>Several girls screamed. The boys leaped from their desks.</p> - -<p>"It's another fire!" yelled Sammy.</p> - -<p>"It's an explosion!" shouted Bob.</p> - -<p>"No! It's an earthquake!" exclaimed Frank. "Come on, everybody! Get out -before the school falls on us!" and he made a rush for the door.</p> - -<p>"Stop!" commanded Miss Williams sharply. "Boys, you are forgetting -yourselves. Let the girls go first!"</p> - -<p>And, while the rumbling continued, and the building still shook, the -boys held back, while the girls rushed from the room.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER II</span> <span class="smaller">THE FIRST SNOW</span></h2> - -<p>The whole school was in excitement. From all the rooms the boys and -girls were rushing out, not stopping for their hats or coats. Frightened -teachers, and the excited principal, were trying to quiet them. For -everyone felt sure the school building was going to fall, and all wanted -to get out as quickly as possible.</p> - -<p>"Now, boys, you may go!" said Miss Williams, when the girls were out of -her room.</p> - -<p>Some of the boys started, but Frank Haven, taking his place at the door, -cried:</p> - -<p>"No, Miss Williams, you go first!"</p> - -<p>She gave him a glance that showed how much she appreciated his -thoughtfulness for her, but she said quietly, though her lips trembled:</p> - -<p>"No, Frank. I am like the captain of a ship. I will stay until the last. -But, oh, do hurry out!"</p> - -<p>Hearing this two other boys made a rush.</p> - -<p>"That won't do!" cried Bob sharply. "You'll all get in a jam on the -stairs."</p> - -<p>"That's right!" exclaimed Sammy. "Form in line, as we always do at fire -drill!"</p> - -<p>"Good!" cried Miss Williams. "Ready! In line! March!"</p> - -<p>Her sharp command had a good effect, and the boys marched<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span> out in order. -Sammy and his two chums came last, and Miss Williams followed them. The -rumbling and shaking of the building still continued, and now dense -white clouds could be seen coming from the basement.</p> - -<p>"She's on fire again!" cried Sammy, as he and his chums reached the yard -safely.</p> - -<p>"And she'll burn up!" added Bob.</p> - -<p>The school yard was filled with excited children, the teachers urging -them to get as far away from the building as they could.</p> - -<p>"Is everyone out?" asked the principal. "Teachers, look at your -different classes and see!"</p> - -<p>This was done quickly.</p> - -<p>"Oh dear!" exclaimed Miss Watson, teacher of the kindergarten. "Oh -dear!"</p> - -<p>"What is it?" someone asked.</p> - -<p>"Johnnie Jones—he isn't here!"</p> - -<p>At that instant, through a cloud of smoke in front of the window of the -kindergarten room a face could be seen. It was that of Johnnie Jones.</p> - -<p>"He's in there!" gasped his teacher.</p> - -<p>"I'll get him!" shouted the principal. "Get the children farther off!"</p> - -<p>"Now, let me get him—please?" cried another voice, and Jed Burr, the -bully, who had apologized that morning, sprang forward and went back -again into the building which it was feared would fall at any moment.</p> - -<p>"I can't let him do that!" murmured the principal. "I must go after both -of them."</p> - -<p>But before he could do this Jed came out again, carrying fat little -Johnnie Jones in his arms.</p> - -<p>"I got him all right!" shouted the former bully.</p> - -<p>"You're a brave boy!" cried Mr. Tetlow.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span></p><p>Just then the janitor of the school came up out of the basement.</p> - -<p>"It's all right!" he cried, through a white cloud of steam. "I have -fixed it! I'll tell you all how it happened."</p> - -<p>"Is the earthquake over?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"It wasn't an earthquake," said Mr. Hobb, the janitor. "Come here, and -I'll tell you about it."</p> - -<p>And while the frightened teachers and pupils are gathering back in their -rooms, the danger being over, I will take a few moments to tell my new -readers something about the boys and others who are to have parts in -this story, and also something about the previous books in this series.</p> - -<p>To begin with, I think you already know my three heroes—Sammy Brown, -Bob Bouncer and Frank Haven. Though I have named him last in this case, -Frank was generally the leader in anything he and his two chums did. Bob -and Sammy thought there was no one in the world like Frank.</p> - -<p>Sammy was rather more quiet, and his mother said more thoughtful, but if -this was so, it was only because Sammy was always thinking up something -to do. He was quite a reader, and liked stories of mystery, and buried -treasure. He was always sure that some day he would find a hidden store -of gold, or make some big discovery.</p> - -<p>Bob Bouncer was a different sort of lad. He was full of fun, not to say -mischief, and when he was around one had better look out that he did not -find a funny note pinned to his coat-tail or else watch out that he did -not discover a stone dropped into his pocket. But, though Bob played -many jokes, they were not mean or cruel ones.</p> - -<p>The three boys lived in the town of Fairview, on the shore of Rainbow -Lake, a large body of water, in the centre of which was an extensive -island.</p> - -<p>The first book of this series was called "The Fairview<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span> Boys Afloat and -Ashore; Or, The Young Crusoes of Pine Island." In that I had the -pleasure of telling how the three chums went out on the lake in the -<i>Puff</i>, a sailboat owned by George Haven, Frank's brother. They did not -know much about boats, and the result was that the <i>Puff</i> was wrecked -near Pine Island. The boys managed to get on this body of land, and -there they lived, until rescued, in real Robinson Crusoe style.</p> - -<p>In the second book, called "The Fairview Boys on Eagle Mountain; Or, -Sammy Brown's Treasure Hunt," I related how the lads set off on a tour -of discovery. Sammy Brown had come across some curious papers in his -home attic, and was sure they told of hidden treasure. So the party set -off for Eagle Mountain, and what they did there, and how the treasure -hunt ended, you may read of in the book.</p> - -<p>"The Fairview Boys and Their Rivals; Or, Bob Bouncer's Schooldays," is -the name of the third volume. In that you can find out all about the -many things Bob and his chums did; how they got the better of a mad -bull, how they had fun in the woods, and how it was that Jed Burr came -to be expelled. Then came the robbery of Mr. Haven's jewelry store, the -fire in the school, and the finding of the jewelry down in the well, -where the thief had thrown it.</p> - -<p>And the fire, as I have related, was the cause of the school not being -opened on the regular day in the term. Which brings us down to the -present time.</p> - -<p>"Was there a fire?" asked Mr. Tetlow, the principal.</p> - -<p>"No, not exactly a fire," answered the janitor, "though the trouble was -caused by a fire."</p> - -<p>"And there wasn't any earthquake?" asked Sammy. He was rather -disappointed, to tell the truth, that there had been nothing as big and -sensational as an earthquake.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span></p><p>"Nary an earthquake," went on Mr. Hobb, who was rather pale. "Indeed -everyone had been greatly alarmed."</p> - -<p>"But the building shook!" declared Nellie Somers.</p> - -<p>"It certainly did," agreed Miss Williams. "I thought surely it was going -to fall down."</p> - -<p>"And I thought Jed was going to fall down with me," spoke up Johnnie -Jones. "He shook me up and down."</p> - -<p>"I couldn't help it," said Jed, with blushing face. "You're so—so fat."</p> - -<p>"I guess I am," sighed little Johnnie.</p> - -<p>"Well, Jed, it was one of the bravest acts I have ever seen," declared -the principal, and Jed blushed with pleasure. It seemed that he wanted -to make up for his mean tricks in the past by showing that he could be a -hero when he desired.</p> - -<p>"Now I'll tell you how it was," went on the janitor.</p> - -<p>"Yes, do," urged Mr. Tetlow. "We don't want it to happen again."</p> - -<p>By this time the excitement had quieted down. There was no more smoke, -and there was no smell of fire.</p> - -<p>"I had started up the new heating boiler to try it," explained the -janitor. "We didn't exactly need steam on to-day, though it is a bit -cold, and it looks like snow. But I thought I'd try the new steam plant, -so I built a fire in the boiler.</p> - -<p>"I left it going and went off to do some work in another part of the -school, and I guess I forgot about the steam. Anyhow, all at once I -heard the roar and the rumble, and I felt the building shake. I knew -right away what had happened, and I ran down cellar. I didn't even stop -to explain to anyone."</p> - -<p>"Well, what did happen?" asked the principal.</p> - -<p>"Why, the safety valve got stuck, and when the pressure got too heavy it -wouldn't let the steam escape. So the pipes, all through the school, -were filled and the pressure was so<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> strong that they commenced to shake -and tremble. That made the building vibrate, and the boiler began to -rumble and roar, too.</p> - -<p>"I was afraid it might blow up, so down I rushed and opened the safety -valve that was stuck shut. That let out the steam, and the pressure in -the pipes went down. And that's all."</p> - -<p>"It was enough," said Miss Williams. "So that white cloud was steam, and -not smoke from a fire?"</p> - -<p>"Yes, ma'am," answered the janitor, "it was only steam."</p> - -<p>"Is the safety valve all right now?" asked Mr. Tetlow.</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, indeed!" exclaimed the janitor. "I fixed it. I should have -looked at it first, but it slipped my mind. I'm sorry."</p> - -<p>"Well, it's all right, as long as no one is hurt," said the principal. -"And now, as we have had so much excitement, I hardly believe that you -children could do well with your lessons this morning. It is eleven -o'clock now, so I will dismiss you all until this afternoon. Come back -when you have had your dinners."</p> - -<p>There were cries of delight at this, and the boys and girls hurried back -into their classrooms, after their hats and coats, for the weather -seemed to be getting colder.</p> - -<p>Sammy and his two chums passed close to Jed Burr as they went in. Then -Sammy did a kind act.</p> - -<p>"Will you shake hands, Jed?" he asked of the former bully. "That was a -fine thing you did."</p> - -<p>Jed blushed.</p> - -<p>"Aw, that was nothin'," he said. "There wasn't any danger."</p> - -<p>"But you didn't know that," returned Frank. "I'd like to shake hands -with you, too."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span></p><p>"So would I," added Bob Bouncer. "I guess we'll all be friends now, -after this."</p> - -<p>"I've turned over a new leaf," said Jed, when they had shaken hands with -him. "I'm not going to bother you fellows any more."</p> - -<p>"That's good," spoke Sammy, for Jed had been a sore trial to them, and -to many other small lads of Fairview.</p> - -<p>"And we'd be glad to have you around to our clubhouse whenever you want -to come," added Frank, kindly.</p> - -<p>"Thanks," said Jed, gratefully.</p> - -<p>After Bob Bouncer had discovered Mr. Haven's jewelry hidden in the well, -following the schoolhouse fire, the merchant had offered Bob a reward of -a hundred dollars. But Bob's father would not let him take it, so Mr. -Haven used the money in fitting up, in his barn, a fine clubroom and -gymnasium for Bob and his chums.</p> - -<p>Talking over the accident to the steam boiler, and making merry that -they had had such a short morning session, the boys and girls hurried -along on their way home. Sammy and his chums walked together, and, every -now and then, Sammy would look up at the sky.</p> - -<p>"What are you planning now?" asked Bob, giving Sammy a sly punch in the -ribs. "Studying how to make an airship?" and he winked at Frank.</p> - -<p>"Aw, let me alone," begged Sammy. "Can't I look at the weather if I want -to?"</p> - -<p>"Sure," agreed Bob. "But what makes you so serious about it?"</p> - -<p>"I'm thinking it's going to snow," answered Sammy, "and I'm going to get -out my sled, when I go home, to be ready for it. I've got to get the -rust off the runners."</p> - -<p>"Snow!" cried Frank. "It won't snow to-day."</p> - -<p>But it did. Before school was out that afternoon the white<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> flakes began -coming lazily down, and the children, looking from the windows, felt -merry at the prospect of a storm. Snow is so different from rain. Almost -everyone is happy and jolly when it snows, but miserable when it rains.</p> - -<p>"Say, it's going to be a good storm all right!" cried Sammy, as he and -his chums came out of school when lessons were over for the day. "It's -three inches deep now, and falling fast."</p> - -<p>"Yes, we'll have to get out our snow-shoes if it keeps on," laughed Bob, -as he slyly dropped some snow down Frank's neck.</p> - -<p>"Ouch!" cried Frank, squirming about as he felt the coldness down his -spine. "I'll wash your face for that, Bob Bouncer!"</p> - -<p>He raced down the street after his fun-loving chum, but before he -reached him he saw something that made him stop. This was the sight of -an elderly lady walking carefully along, just ahead of him, through the -snow. As Frank came up behind her he saw her fall heavily, and lay quite -still in a heap on the sidewalk.</p> - -<p>"Here you go, fellows!" cried Frank, to Bob and Sammy. "We've got to -help her—come here!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER III</span> <span class="smaller">SAMMY HAS AN IDEA</span></h2> - -<p>"Maybe she's dead!" gasped Sammy Brown, as he reached the side of Frank, -and looked down on the motionless old lady.</p> - -<p>"There you go!" cried Frank, half angrily, "always thinking something -like that. Why should she be dead?"</p> - -<p>"She fell heavily enough," said Bob. "The snow's awful slippery. Maybe -her leg's broken."</p> - -<p>"That's more like it," said Frank. "Now we've got to take her into one -of these houses. Can we carry her?"</p> - -<p>"I guess we'll have to," said Bob. "There doesn't seem to be anyone else -around just now. Can we lift her?"</p> - -<p>At that moment the elderly lady who had fallen tried to get up. Her -eyes, that had been closed, were opened, and she looked very pale.</p> - -<p>"Are you hurt?" asked Frank, anxiously. "We'll help you get up, and -carry you into one of these houses."</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i023.jpg" alt="Are you hurt? asked Frank" /></div> - -<p class="bold">"Are you hurt?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>He gazed up and down the street as he spoke. There were no other persons -in sight, and the accident had happened at a place where there were only -a few houses. Had there been stores nearby someone might have come out -at once to help the old lady.</p> - -<p>"I don't believe I am badly hurt," she said, with a smile. "I thought at -first my leg was broken, but I'm sure, now, it is not, though it may be -sprained. I slipped and struck my head when I went down. I must have -been unconscious for a few seconds."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span></p><p>"You were," said Bob, who had once seen his mother faint. "Now, if -you'll let us, we can carry you to the nearest house, and get a doctor."</p> - -<p>"I'm sure I'm very much obliged to you nice boys," spoke the elderly -lady, "but I do not believe you can carry me. I am pretty heavy."</p> - -<p>"We're strong," declared Sammy. "We play football!" he added, proudly.</p> - -<p>"Well, I think I can walk," the lady went on, "though I may have to lean -on your shoulders. I should not have come out without my rubbers to-day, -but I did not think it was going to snow. I guess Winter has set in now, -and I rather dread it."</p> - -<p>The boys thought this strange. To them Winter was one of their jolly -seasons, when they had much fun. They did not stop to think that the -poor and the old do not like the hard cold of Winter.</p> - -<p>"If you will let me take hold of your hands," went on the elderly lady, -"I think I can get to my feet. Then you may be able to help me to one of -those houses."</p> - -<p>She held up her hands as she spoke. Sammy took one and Frank the other, -while Bob lifted her at the shoulders.</p> - -<p>"Now!" she exclaimed, in a stronger voice than she had used before, "all -together, and I'll be up!"</p> - -<p>The boys pulled and pushed, and slowly the old lady was gotten to her -feet. She swayed unsteadily for a moment, and leaned heavily on Frank.</p> - -<p>Just then, a window in the nearest house was opened, and a woman, -leaning out, called:</p> - -<p>"Bring her right over here, boys. I'll look after her. I'll come and -help you. Are you much hurt, Mrs. Blake? I just happened to see you."</p> - -<p>"No, thank you, I'm not much hurt. I think I'm all right,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span> except -perhaps for a strain, or some bruises," was the answer. "I have good -helpers, you see. Don't come out in the storm. They can get me to your -house."</p> - -<p>"Are you Mrs. Blake?" asked Sammy, quickly.</p> - -<p>"That is my name," was her answer, with a smile.</p> - -<p>"I guess my mother knows you," went on Sammy. "Her name is Brown."</p> - -<p>"Oh, are you Mrs. Brown's boy?" exclaimed Mrs. Blake. "I thought I knew -your face. Well, I'm real glad to see you. And are these your brothers?"</p> - -<p>"No'm, they're my chums," answered Sammy. "Do you feel all right now?"</p> - -<p>"Yes, only a trifle dizzy. I'll be better when I rest a bit in Mrs. -Handee's house. Now let me see if I can walk."</p> - -<p>She found that she could, by going slowly. The shock of her fall was -passing off, and by leaning on the shoulders of Bob and Frank, while -Sammy carried her bag and umbrella for her, she made her way to the -house where the woman waited with the door open. Mrs. Handee came down -the front steps to help Mrs. Blake up, and soon the elderly lady was -sitting comfortably in an easy chair before the fire.</p> - -<p>"My!" exclaimed Mrs. Blake, leaning back comfortably. "This has been -quite an experience for me," and she looked at the three boys, who did -not know exactly what to do, now that they had come in. "I never fell -before—not since I was a girl, and I guess I've forgotten how to do -it."</p> - -<p>"You were lucky not to have broken some bones," spoke Mrs. Handee. "Are -you sure you don't want the doctor?"</p> - -<p>"We'll go for one!" offered Sammy, eagerly.</p> - -<p>"Oh, no, indeed, I don't want one," declared Mrs. Blake, with a laugh. -"I'll be all right soon, and able to go home. My daughter will be -worried about me. My, how it snows!"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span> and she looked out of the window -where could be seen a perfect cloud of white flakes coming down.</p> - -<p>"Yes, I think we're going have a regular old-fashioned Winter," said -Mrs. Handee. "I dread it, too. Now I'm going to make you a nice hot cup -of tea. Will you boys have something to eat?" she asked.</p> - -<p>Sammy and his chums looked at one another and their faces got rather -red.</p> - -<p>"If—if you please," said Sammy, "I'm not allowed to have strong tea."</p> - -<p>"Me either!" added Frank and Bob.</p> - -<p>"Bless your hearts! I didn't mean tea!" laughed Mrs. Handee. "It is not -good for growing boys, unless it's very, very weak, and then it isn't -tea. I meant to give you some bread and jam. Do you think you could eat -it?"</p> - -<p>"Could we?" murmured Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Just try us, Mrs. Handee!" exclaimed Frank, and, with another laugh, -the lady of the house went out to the kitchen.</p> - -<p>"Well, I'm sure I can't thank you boys enough for what you did for me," -said Mrs. Blake, after a pause.</p> - -<p>"It wasn't anything," replied Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, it was, too!" she insisted. "I thank you very much, and I want -to tell your mothers what nice boys you are. Lots of young folks -now-a-days don't think, or care, anything about the old folks. Seems to -me, now, that I've often seen you three boys around Fairview together; -haven't I?" and she looked at them closely.</p> - -<p>"Yes'm, we're generally together," replied Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Do you go camping together?" asked Mrs. Blake.</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, often," spoke Frank.</p> - -<p>"And once we were all wrecked together on Pine Island," added Bob.</p> - -<p>"You don't tell me!" exclaimed Mrs. Blake. "On Pine<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> Island? Why I have -a brother there. Peter Jessup is his name. He's quite a hunter, too. He -lives at the far end, near Woodport. Have you ever been there?"</p> - -<p>"No, we were down at the other end," said Frank.</p> - -<p>"Then perhaps you did not meet my brother?"</p> - -<p>"No, not that we know of," answered Sammy.</p> - -<p>"I'm sure he'd be glad to see you," proceeded Mrs. Blake. "He is fond of -boys. When he was young he was just like you, always going off on -hunting or fishing trips. If ever you go to Pine Island again I wish -you'd call on him. I'll write him a letter, explaining how kind you have -been to me, and I'm sure he'd be glad to see you at his hunting cabin."</p> - -<p>"Has he a hunting cabin?" asked Bob, his eyes shining in delight.</p> - -<p>"Indeed he has, with lots of skins, and deer horns and the like of that -in it," said Mrs. Blake. "Of course he did not get them all around here, -for game is rather scarce. But he lives the life of a hunter still, -sleeps in a 'bunk' as he calls it, and all that. He even cooks over a -campfire in the summer."</p> - -<p>"Oh, I wish we could go there!" sighed Bob.</p> - -<p>"I'm sure you'll be welcome," spoke Mrs. Blake. And then Mrs. Handee -came in with the tea for her elderly guest, and the bread and jam for -the boys, and that they enjoyed it I am sure I need not say.</p> - -<p>"Well, I think I will be able to go along now," said Mrs. Blake, after a -pause. "That tea made me feel much better."</p> - -<p>"Are you sure you can go?" asked Mrs. Handee. "It's quite a step to your -daughter's house."</p> - -<p>"Oh, I can do it," was the answer. "My leg is much better, and I only -have a slight headache. I thank you very much. As for you boys, don't -forget to come and see me, and I'll tell you more about my brother -Peter. I'll be sure to write to him and tell him you're going to visit -him."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span></p><p>"We'll go if we can," said Frank.</p> - -<p>Sammy Brown seemed to be thinking deeply on some subject.</p> - -<p>The boys said good-bye and went out into the storm. The snow was still -coming down, and they wanted to play in it—to make balls to toss at one -another, to roll in it, to jump over and into the drifts, to roll big -balls as the foundation for a snow house.</p> - -<p>There was nothing more they could do for Mrs. Blake, she said, and she -would soon start for home herself. So Sammy, Bob and Frank hurried away, -promising to call on the lady to whose aid they had come.</p> - -<p>"Are you really going?" asked Frank of his chums, as they walked on -through the snow. "I mean to her house?"</p> - -<p>"Of course we are!" cried Sammy. "I want to meet her brother the hunter; -don't you?"</p> - -<p>"I guess it would be nice," agreed Frank.</p> - -<p>"Nice!" cried Sammy. "Say, I guess you don't know what might happen if -we went to see him; do you?"</p> - -<p>"You mean we might shoot a bear or a deer?" laughed Frank.</p> - -<p>"No, I don't mean anything like that, for now there aren't any such -things on Pine Island. But you know we never have been up at the far end -of the island, and we might find——"</p> - -<p>"Oh, I know what he's going to say!" cried Frank, as he threw a snowball -at a boy going down the street. "You're thinking we can find some -treasure there; eh, Sammy?"</p> - -<p>"Well, we might!" insisted Sammy, not minding the laughs of his chums. -"That part of the island is lonely enough for treasure. But I had -another idea."</p> - -<p>"Say, you're full of 'em to-day!" remarked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Let's hear it," suggested Frank.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span></p><p>"Well, you know there's supposed to be a queer old hermit up at the far -end of the island," went on Sammy.</p> - -<p>"A hermit?" cried Frank.</p> - -<p>"Yes, a strange old hermit, with a long white beard, and I've heard it -said that he has some secret he's trying to hide. If we go there we -might find out the secret. Now what do you think of that for an idea?" -demanded Sammy, eagerly.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER IV</span> <span class="smaller">A QUEER SIGHT</span></h2> - -<p>Sammy's two chums looked strangely at him. He returned their gaze -steadily.</p> - -<p>"Well," he said, defiantly, "it's true! What makes you look at me that -way?"</p> - -<p>"Ha! Ha!" laughed Frank. "He's the same old Sammy, isn't he, Bob?"</p> - -<p>"That's what he is! Always thinking he's going to find a treasure, and -if he can't do that he trots out an old hermit. Go on, Sammy, can't you -scare up a ghost while you're at it? The ghost of Pine Island! Go ahead, -make up something about that."</p> - -<p>Sammy Brown turned squarely about, and walked away from his chums -without saying a word.</p> - -<p>For a moment Frank and Bob looked after him, and then they looked at one -another.</p> - -<p>"There he goes," exclaimed Frank.</p> - -<p>"And I guess he's mad, too," added Bob.</p> - -<p>"But I didn't mean anything."</p> - -<p>"Neither did I!"</p> - -<p>"Let's call him back."</p> - -<p>"Let's go after him!"</p> - -<p>Thus Bob and Frank spoke, one after the other. Then Bob cried:</p> - -<p>"I say, Sammy! Come on back! Wait a minute. We didn't mean anything."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span></p><p>But Sammy kept on his way, never turning his head to look back. On he -plodded through the snow that was still falling.</p> - -<p>"He's real mad this time," said Bob.</p> - -<p>"Yes, I guess we'll have to apologize, same as Jed Burr did," agreed -Frank. "Come on!"</p> - -<p>Together they raced after Sammy, and, catching up to him, they grasped -him by either arm. They spoke quickly and eagerly by turns.</p> - -<p>"We didn't mean anything."</p> - -<p>"We were only fooling."</p> - -<p>"Maybe there is a hermit on Pine Island after all."</p> - -<p>"We—we apologize!" burst out Frank.</p> - -<p>He said it in such a comical manner that Sammy, hurt as his feelings had -been, could not stand out against his chums any longer. A smile came -over his face, and then Bob and Frank laughed too.</p> - -<p>"All right, Sammy," declared Frank. "We believe you. Tell us about the -hermit. Maybe we can go up there and see him."</p> - -<p>"And about the ghost, too," added Bob.</p> - -<p>"There isn't any ghost that I know of," cried Sammy, quickly, "and I -didn't mention any."</p> - -<p>"Bob means the hermit," said Frank quickly, winking at his chum to show -that he must not speak of that subject again. "Tell us about the hermit, -Sammy."</p> - -<p>"Well, I'll tell you all I heard," went on the lad who so loved to dig -after mysteries. "It was Benny Lane, the cripple boy, who told me. I was -walking along with him one day, about a week ago, and we saw old Silas -Dolby, the miser, just ahead of us. I just happened to say that Mr. -Dolby lived like a hermit, and Benny said that it was so, for his uncle -had once seen a hermit."</p> - -<p>"And of course that set you going right off," spoke Bob.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span></p><p>"Yes, it did," answered Sammy. "I asked Benny where his uncle had seen -the hermit, and Ben said it was on Pine Island. That was the first I -ever heard of one of those men being there, so I asked all I could about -it.</p> - -<p>"Benny didn't know much, but he said his uncle had been out fishing one -day, and stopped off at Pine Island to eat his lunch. He was almost -through, when an old man, all stooped over, and with a long white beard, -came out of the bushes, shook a stick at Benny's uncle and told him to -get off that part of the island, as he owned it."</p> - -<p>"Did he go?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"Yes," went on Sammy, "for the hermit acted dangerous. Ben's uncle -thought maybe he might be an escaped lunatic. So he got into his boat, -the hermit watching him all the while, and rowed away."</p> - -<p>"And what became of the hermit?" asked Frank, always eager for details.</p> - -<p>"He disappeared into the bushes again," said Sammy. "I didn't tell you -fellows anything about this, for I knew you'd laugh. Then, when Mrs. -Blake just now told us about her brother living on Pine Island, and when -she said we might go to see him, I thought I'd tell you about the -hermit. But you didn't believe me."</p> - -<p>"Oh, but we do now!" said Frank, quickly.</p> - -<p>"And is he hunting after a buried treasure?" asked Bob. He began to -think there might be more, after all, to Sammy's story than he had at -first thought.</p> - -<p>"I don't know, for sure, anything about a treasure there," said Sammy, -remembering how he had once started on a treasure hunt, which had ended -in the finding of only a pocketbook with memorandum papers in it. And -this belonged to Miser Dolby. But there was something else of value in -the wallet, so, after all, Sammy's hunt amounted to something.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span></p><p>"Well, we might go up to the island, and see the wild hermit, anyhow," -suggested Frank. "That would give us something to do when we get a day -or so of vacation."</p> - -<p>"The only trouble is that the lake will soon be frozen over," put in -Bob.</p> - -<p>"We could skate over," suggested Sammy.</p> - -<p>"That's right, we could!" cried Frank. "We'll do it!"</p> - -<p>"What do you s'pose the hermit lives on the island for?" asked Bob. "And -why didn't we see him when we were wrecked there?"</p> - -<p>"I don't know," replied Sammy. "Maybe he likes to be lonesome, or else -maybe no one wants him to live near them. He may be sort of wild."</p> - -<p>"I should think he was, if he drove Benny's uncle away," came from -Frank. "We'll have to be careful if we meet him."</p> - -<p>"That's right," agreed Sammy Brown.</p> - -<p>The boys kept on toward their homes, meeting with many of their friends -on the way. There were several snowballs thrown, all in good fun, and -some of the boys proposed to make a snow fort, and have a regular -snowball fight.</p> - -<p>The next day, after school, the fort was built in a vacant lot. Then the -boys divided into sides, one party getting inside the fort, and the -other, outside, trying to capture it.</p> - -<p>The three chums decided it would be more fun to storm the fort, so they -joined the outside forces. The battle lasted for some time, and many -snowballs were thrown back and forth.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i035.jpg" alt="The battle lasted for some time" /></div> - -<p class="bold">The battle lasted for some time.</p> - -<p>"Come on, now! Charge on the enemy!" cried Frank, when he thought he saw -a good chance to take the fort.</p> - -<p>He led the charge, and with such good effect that the fort was captured, -and he and his chums left in possession. Then<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> the battle turned about, -and the snowball fight began all over again.</p> - -<p>Several days of winter fun passed. The boys and girls went coasting -before and after school, made snow-men and rolled large snowballs. The -weather was pleasant, and just warm enough so that the snow would pack -well.</p> - -<p>One day Mrs. Blake called on Mrs. Brown, to thank her for the way in -which Sammy and his chums had helped her.</p> - -<p>"Your son and his chums are very bright and good boys," said Mrs. Blake, -who had gotten over her fall in the snow. "I have written to my brother, -Peter Jessup, about them, and he says anytime they want to visit his end -of Pine Island he'll be glad to look after them."</p> - -<p>"That is very kind of him," said Mrs. Brown, "but Sammy and his two -friends go off now on more strange trips than I think is good for them."</p> - -<p>"Oh, pshaw!" exclaimed Mrs. Blake. "Boys will be boys! Let 'em roam, I -say, as long as you know where they are, and that they are safe."</p> - -<p>"Well, I guess if they get the chance they'll go," laughed Mrs. Brown. -"They generally get what they're after. I'll tell them of your -kindness."</p> - -<p>When Sammy and his chums heard of what Mrs. Blake had said, and of the -invitation of Mr. Jessup, the hunter, they grew excited at once, and -wanted to start for Pine Island the next day.</p> - -<p>But there was school to be thought of, and they, as well as the other -pupils, had missed considerable on account of the delay caused by the -fire.</p> - -<p>"Besides, it's Winter now—not Summer," said Mrs. Brown. "It would not -do to go to the island in Winter."</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, it would," cried Sammy. "We could dress warm."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span></p><p>"Besides," said Frank, "Mr. Jessup had a warm cabin."</p> - -<p>"Well, you'd better wait," suggested Sammy's mother, and they had to do -so.</p> - -<p>But, about a week after this, there came a cold spell of weather and the -lake was frozen over. When Frank awoke one morning he looked out of his -window, and saw a sheet of ice on Rainbow.</p> - -<p>"Oh, fine!" he cried. "Now for some skating!"</p> - -<p>He took his skates to school with him that morning, as did Sammy and -Bob, and during the noon recess the chums, and several of their friends, -tried the ice. It was smooth, and thick enough to be safe.</p> - -<p>"Let's skate over to Pine Island after school is out!" proposed Sammy.</p> - -<p>"I'm with you!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>"And I'll go too," added Frank. "Maybe we'll see the hermit."</p> - -<p>They said nothing to their companions about their plans, but when school -was dismissed that afternoon they put on their skates and started across -the frozen lake. They felt sure they could reach the island and get back -home before dark, and each had received permission to go skating after -school, though the island was not mentioned.</p> - -<p>It was glorious fun on the ice. For some time the three chums found -themselves in the midst of their skating companions, but they soon left -them behind, and, a little later, were nearing Pine Island.</p> - -<p>"Make for the upper end," advised Sammy. "That's where the hermit will -be, if he's anywhere."</p> - -<p>But though they had had good luck up to this time, bad luck now set in. -First the skate of one of the boys would become loose, and he would have -to stop and tighten it. Then the same thing would happen to another. So -they were<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span> delayed, and it was almost dusk when they came opposite the -far end of the island. This was a place they had seldom, if ever, -visited.</p> - -<p>"Well, here we are at last," said Sammy. "I'm going to take off my -skates and go ashore a while. My feet ache."</p> - -<p>"We really ought to go back," said Frank, slowly. "It's getting dark, -and if we're as long going home as we were coming it will be after six -when we get in. The folks will worry."</p> - -<p>"Oh, well, we won't stay but a minute—just to rest," said Bob. "I'm all -out of wind."</p> - -<p>"Well, all right," agreed Frank.</p> - -<p>So they took off their skates and walked on the island. It was covered -with snow, and curiously still and silent.</p> - -<p>"I wonder where Mr. Jessup has his cabin?" spoke Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Probably well inland," said Frank.</p> - -<p>"Hark!" cautioned Bob.</p> - -<p>There sounded a rustling in the bushes just ahead of the boys, near a -clump of trees. Something moved.</p> - -<p>"Maybe it's a bear!" exclaimed Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Huh! Like the one you thought you saw before, only it was a dog!" -laughed Bob.</p> - -<p>"Forget it!" grunted Sammy. He did not like to be reminded of that.</p> - -<p>"Look!" suddenly exclaimed Frank. With trembling finger he pointed -straight ahead. It seemed as if a snowbank was moving. And then the boys -saw a queer sight.</p> - -<p>A shaggy head of white hair, and a long white beard rose up almost in -front of them. The hair and beard framed a scowling face, that glared -directly at the three boys.</p> - -<p>"Quick! Run!" cried Sammy. "It's the wild hermit of Pine Island!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER V</span> <span class="smaller">WINTER FUN</span></h2> - -<p>For a moment, in spite of Sammy's warning, neither of his chums was able -to move. Nor, for that matter, was Sammy either. As snakes are said to -charm birds by looking at them steadily, so the sight of the old hermit, -if such he was, seemed to charm the three boys into standing still there -in the snow on the shore of Pine Island.</p> - -<p>It was rather a scary scene, with dusk falling, amid a silence that was -more startling than noise would have been. The old man rose up from the -snow-covered bushes, seeming to tower more than six feet in height. He -looked steadily at the boys.</p> - -<p>Then Sammy found his voice again, and yelled:</p> - -<p>"Come on, fellows, run!"</p> - -<p>"That's right! I'm with you!" added Frank.</p> - -<p>And by this time Bob Bouncer had gotten over his first fright, so he, -too, added his voice to those of his chums.</p> - -<p>"Hit him!" he cried. "Throw a snowball at him!"</p> - -<p>"Don't you dare do it!" came from Sammy. "That'll make him awful mad! -Run for all you're worth!"</p> - -<p>This seemed the best advice, for really the old man, in spite of his -long white hair and beard, that made him look something like the -pictures of Santa Claus, had not a kindly-appearing face. He scowled, as -though very angry at the boys.</p> - -<p>As yet he had not said a word, only, as he rose to his full height, he -made a move as if to come from behind the bushes, back of which he -seemed to have been hiding.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span></p><p>"Here he comes!" yelled Sammy. "Come on, fellows!"</p> - -<p>They needed no other warning. The three boys took to their heels, and -crashed over the snow and bramble-covered ground to the edge of the -frozen lake.</p> - -<p>"You'd better get away from here!" yelled the strange old man after -them. "If I catch you around here again, I'll——"</p> - -<p>But the boys did not stop to hear what he would do to them. They did not -even stop to fasten on their skates, but ran over the ice, slipping and -sliding.</p> - -<p>"Is—is he coming?" gasped Bob.</p> - -<p>"I don't know. Look back and see for yourself," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>Bob did so, but as one cannot very well run over slippery ice and look -backward at the same time, what happened to Bob can be easily imagined.</p> - -<p>Down he went in a heap, rolling over and over, and sliding along as -well.</p> - -<p>"Hey, fellows!" he cried. "Don't leave me. Help! He'll get me sure! Stay -with me!"</p> - -<p>His appeal touched the hearts of his chums.</p> - -<p>"We can't leave him like that!" said Frank.</p> - -<p>"No," panted Sammy. "We'll have to stay with him."</p> - -<p>They slid along, unable at first to stop on the slippery ice, and then -they slowly came to a halt. Turning, they went back to pick up Bob, but -he had already scrambled to his feet, and was running after them.</p> - -<p>"He isn't coming," said Frank, catching sight of the strange man, -standing on the shore of the island, near where the boys had landed. "I -guess he isn't going to chase us."</p> - -<p>"It's a good thing, too," panted Bob.</p> - -<p>"Why?" asked Frank, with a smile.</p> - -<p>"Because if he'd come after me I'd have hit him with my skates; that's -what I would!" boasted Bob.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span></p><p>"What did you run for then?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"'Cause you fellows did. Think I was going to stay there all alone and -tackle him? I was not! So he isn't coming after us; eh?"</p> - -<p>"No, there he stands," answered Sammy, peering through the darkness. -They could just make out the old hermit, and as they looked they saw him -shake his fist at them. Then he disappeared behind a tree.</p> - -<p>"Well, come on, let's get on our skates and make for home," proposed -Frank. "It's getting late, and the folks will be worried."</p> - -<p>"That's right," agreed Sammy. "But I guess, after this, you fellows will -believe what I tell you about hermits and—and things; won't you?"</p> - -<p>"Well, you were right about the hermit," admitted Frank. "He sure is -there. But that doesn't say there's treasure on the island."</p> - -<p>"Treasure! Of course there is!" insisted Sammy. "Did you ever know of a -hermit where there wasn't treasure? That's what hermits are for—to -guard a treasure."</p> - -<p>"Well, maybe," said Bob, slowly. "Anyhow if there <i>was</i> treasure on the -island, I wouldn't want to hunt for it if that terrible old man was -guarding it."</p> - -<p>"I would," spoke Sammy, bravely. "Maybe he doesn't look so scary by -daytime. I'm coming up again."</p> - -<p>"I'm not!" exclaimed Bob. But none of the boys knew how soon they would -again visit Pine Island, nor what strange adventures they would have -there.</p> - -<p>They soon had their skates on, and struck off across the frozen lake -toward Fairview and their homes. It grew darker and darker, but -presently the stars came out, and as the ice was glaring white they did -not have much trouble seeing their way.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span></p><p>Reaching home, they found their parents just beginning to get alarmed -about them, fearing there had been some accident on the ice. The boys -told of their adventure, but in their own homes, with the lamps lighted, -and warm fires glowing, the encounter with the hermit did not seem so -terrible as it had at the time it happened.</p> - -<p>"If I see him again I'm going to speak to him," declared Sammy. "I'm -going to ask him why he doesn't want anybody on that part of the -island."</p> - -<p>"Better not," advised Sammy's father. "He may be harmless if let alone, -but his mind may be diseased, and if you annoy him he might do you some -harm."</p> - -<p>"Well, I'll ask Mr. Jessup, the hunter, about him then," decided Sammy, -and his father thought this might be all right.</p> - -<p>There were happy days in Fairview now. Winter had set in to stay, it -seemed, and there was skating and coasting enough to satisfy everyone.</p> - -<p>Sammy and his chums told their friends of their trip to Pine Island, and -of having seen the hermit, and several of the smaller boys of their -acquaintance shivered with fear. A number of the larger boys, including -Jed Burr, at once said they were going up and see if they could not find -the hermit themselves.</p> - -<p>Jed Burr, I might say, was quite a different boy now. He no longer was a -bully, tormenting those younger or weaker than himself. His suspension, -and the apology he had had to make, seemed to have taken good effect on -him.</p> - -<p>Then, too, he was looked upon somewhat as a hero, from having gone back -to rescue the little boy at the time when it was thought the school was -going to be toppled over by an earthquake.</p> - -<p>"I like Jed now," said Sammy, one day.</p> - -<p>"So do I," added Bob.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span></p><p>"He's real kind," said Frank. "Yesterday I had to bring home from the -store a heavy basket of potatoes. Jed met me and carried it for me."</p> - -<p>And Jed himself was glad that he had "turned over a new leaf." He was -finding out that it is more fun, in the end, to be good than to be bad. -And Jed's teacher was glad, too, for he gave her less trouble.</p> - -<p>So, as I say, Jed and some of the bigger boys in the school, having -heard of the experience of Sammy and his chums, had decided to go to -Pine Island, to see if they could not find the hermit.</p> - -<p>"Will you come along, Sammy, and show us where you saw him?" asked Jed.</p> - -<p>"I will, if Bob and Frank will," was the answer.</p> - -<p>But Bob and Frank would not go, and Sammy would not go without them. So -Jed and his chums set off by themselves on their skates for Pine Island. -They were gone nearly the whole of one Saturday, but when they came back -they were disappointed, for they had seen nothing of the hermit.</p> - -<p>"I guess you fellows dreamed it," said Jed, with a laugh. "Or else you -saw shadows on the snow."</p> - -<p>"We did not dream it!" declared Sammy.</p> - -<p>"And can shadows holler at you?" Bob wanted to know.</p> - -<p>"No, but maybe you heard an echo," suggested Jed.</p> - -<p>"There couldn't be any echo unless somebody said something," spoke -Frank, "and we heard that hermit speak as plain as anything, and we -weren't saying a word."</p> - -<p>"Well, it's queer we didn't see him," returned Jed.</p> - -<p>Several days passed—days filled with many winter joys. Sammy and his -two chums made themselves skate-sails. They took some sticks, and -stretched cloth over them, something between the sail of a boat and a -kite in shape. Then, holding these sails in their hands, they would let -the wind blow them<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> over the ice. Thus they could skate without getting -tired out.</p> - -<p>Then there were sleighing parties, and coasting races on the big hill -back of the schoolhouse. Sammy and his chums made themselves a bob, by -fastening two low clipper sleds together with a long plank. It had a -steering wheel, and a bell that sounded, as the bob went down hill, to -warn everyone to get out of the way.</p> - -<p>More snowball battles, and the building of snow houses and snow-men made -up other fun for the boys and girls.</p> - -<p>"I'm going to make the biggest snow house that ever was put up in -Fairview!" exclaimed Sammy, one day. Like everything else he did, or had -a part in, Sammy wanted his undertakings to be out of the ordinary.</p> - -<p>"All right, we'll help you," said Bob and Frank.</p> - -<p>They started the snow house in Sammy's yard, as he had proposed it. A -dozen large snowballs were rolled, and put in line on four sides of a -square. These were to be the walls of the house. The walls were made -quite high. Then inside of them was piled all the snow the boys could -gather. They cleared the ground for some distance about the house, and -Sammy's father said if only they would work as hard cleaning off the -sidewalks in winter, they would be doing a good thing.</p> - -<p>"But cleaning sidewalks isn't any fun," declared Sammy, and his chums -agreed with him.</p> - -<p>They were going to make a big snow pile inside the walls of balls, and -then hollow it out, leaving a roof of snow on top. This would be the -house. Besides the door, by which the snow would be shoveled out, there -were also to be windows.</p> - -<p>All went well for a time. Then, when the house was nearly finished, -Sammy's father came out to look at it.</p> - -<p>"You're making your roof too thin, boys," he said. "It will fall in on -you."</p> - -<p>"Oh, I guess not!" boasted Sammy. "We want to have the walls and roof -thin, as that gives us more room inside."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span></p><p>"Well, you mind what I'm telling you," said Mr. Brown.</p> - -<p>Hardly had he spoken when Sammy, who was using his shovel to scrape some -snow from the ceiling of the house, sent his shovel right through the -roof.</p> - -<p>"Oh!" he cried.</p> - -<p>He did not have a chance to say anything more, for, just then, the whole -roof fell in, burying himself as well as Frank and Bob out of sight.</p> - -<p>"I told you so!" cried Mr. Brown.</p> - -<p>However, little harm was done, as the roof was too thin to hurt any of -the boys. They began to dig themselves out, with Mr. Brown's help, and -soon were outside the ruins of their snow house.</p> - -<p>"That's too bad," said Bob.</p> - -<p>"It sure is," agreed Frank.</p> - -<p>"And it was all my fault," admitted Sammy, with a sigh.</p> - -<p>"Never mind," went on Bob. "We can put boards across the walls, now, for -a roof, and cover them with snow."</p> - -<p>"I think that would be the safest plan," spoke Mr. Brown. The boys had -much fun after that, in their snow house.</p> - -<p>"Say, when are we going to take another trip to Pine Island, and look -for—" began Sammy Brown one day, about a week after the falling in of -the snow house roof.</p> - -<p>"Were you going to say look for the hermit?" asked Bob, with a laugh.</p> - -<p>"No, I meant Mr. Jessup, the hunter. I think it would be jolly to go up -and camp there."</p> - -<p>"It would," agreed Frank. "But we have to go to school. It wouldn't be -much fun just to go for one day. I'd like to stay a week."</p> - -<p>"Well maybe we could go when the Christmas vacation comes," suggested -Sammy. "I'm going to ask my folks, anyhow."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span></p><p>"So will I!" cried Frank.</p> - -<p>"And I," added Bob.</p> - -<p>They were on their way home from school that afternoon, talking over the -proposed trip to Pine Island, when, as they came within sight of Rainbow -Lake, Sammy uttered a cry.</p> - -<p>"Look!" he exclaimed, pointing. "The ice must have all melted. There's a -sailboat on the lake!"</p> - -<p>"Sailboat! That isn't a sailboat!" said Bob.</p> - -<p>"No, it's an ice yacht!" cried Frank. "Come on down and let's see who -has it. Maybe they'll give us a ride."</p> - -<p>The boys broke into a run, and soon saw that what Frank had said was -true. It was an ice-boat—one built with runners, like big skates, and a -sail, fixed on a mast, standing up in a platform—shaped like a -triangle. The boat was skimming swiftly over the ice.</p> - -<p>"Say, that's all right!" cried Sammy. "I'm going to make one of those!"</p> - -<p>"There he goes again!" laughed Frank.</p> - -<p>"Well, I am—you'll see!" went on Sammy. "Come closer, and we'll look -how they're made. That seems to be a new kind."</p> - -<p>The three chums went out on the ice toward the skimming boat.</p> - -<p>Suddenly there was a cracking sound, a deep boom, like a shot from a -distant cannon, and a wide crack appeared in the ice, just in front of -the ice-boat. Before those aboard could turn aside, the front part of -the craft had slid into the cold waters of the lake, and several figures -were seen floundering about.</p> - -<p>"Come on!" cried Sammy, breaking into a run. "We've got to help save them!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER VI</span> <span class="smaller">A FINE CHANCE</span></h2> - -<p>The boys, following Sammy, broke into a run. With anxious eyes they -looked toward where the ice-boat had broken through a great crack in the -frozen surface of Rainbow Lake.</p> - -<p>"There's somebody climbing out!" cried Frank, as he saw a figure pull -itself up on the side of the overturned boat.</p> - -<p>"But there are some others there!" exclaimed Sammy. "We've got to save -them all! There's nobody else around!"</p> - -<p>It was true. That part of the lake was deserted at this moment.</p> - -<p>"How are we going to save them?" asked Bob, as he plodded on.</p> - -<p>"I don't know how, but we've got to do it!" panted Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Don't go too close, or the ice will give way with us," cautioned Frank.</p> - -<p>"I was thinking of that," answered Sammy.</p> - -<p>They were now nearing the boat. Part of it rested on firm ice, but the -front part sagged into the water, and the sail was half covered. Sitting -astride of the side of the craft was a boy whom Sammy and his chums -recognized as Jed Burr.</p> - -<p>"Anybody else there?" cried Sammy, as he came to a stop, and looked at -the ice to see if it would be safe to go further.</p> - -<p>"Yes!" cried Jed, as well as he could from shivering, for he was wet -through, and very cold. "Hank Blair is there, and Jim Eaton!"</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span></p><p>"Can you get 'em out?" asked Sammy. "Shall we run for help?"</p> - -<p>"Time help gets here they'll be gone!" groaned Jed. "Oh, why didn't I -see that crack?"</p> - -<p>"Help! Help us out!" came faintly from the black water that could be -seen through the opening of the ice.</p> - -<p>Sammy and his chums, looking under the mast of the overturned ice-boat, -saw two forms struggling in the water. Their hands clung to the edges of -the ice, only to have it break off in their grasp. Then they would bob -under again.</p> - -<p>"We've got to save them!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"We can't!" moaned Bob. "Let's go for help!"</p> - -<p>"Can you reach them?" asked Sammy of Jed, paying no attention to what -Bob said.</p> - -<p>"I could if I had a rope to throw to them. But I can't get a rope! Oh, -what shall I do?"</p> - -<p>Sammy was doing some hard and quick thinking. Something like a rope was -needed so that Jed could hold one end and throw the other to the -floundering lads. A rope? Where could they get one now? True there were -ropes on the ice-boat, but they could not be reached.</p> - -<p>"I have it!" cried Sammy. "Our book straps! Quick, fellows, take the -straps off your books!"</p> - -<p>It was a bright idea. The straps were the very thing needed.</p> - -<p>Now it happened that Sammy and his chums had very long book straps, much -longer than were really needed. They were at least a yard in length, and -often only a few books were carried in them. But the boys had a habit of -also including their skates, and other playthings, in with their books, -so they declared that long straps were needed.</p> - -<p>Frank and Bob at once grasped Sammy's plan. In a trice they had loosed -the buckles, and handed him their straps.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span> He fastened the three -together and thus had a leather rope almost ten feet long.</p> - -<p>"That's the idea!" cried Jed, still shivering on the side of the -ice-boat. "I can reach 'em with that!"</p> - -<p>"You'd better—better reach us—s-s-s-soon!" called Jim Eaton, his teeth -chattering with cold.</p> - -<p>"That's—ri-ri-right!" shivered Hank Blair.</p> - -<p>"Have you out in a jiffy now!" called Jed. "Throw me the strap, Sammy!"</p> - -<p>"I'll bring it to you," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"No, don't. It mightn't be safe. The whole boat might slip into the -water."</p> - -<p>So Sammy tossed the three straps, fastened together as they were, to -Jed, who caught them. The next moment, holding firmly to one end, Jed -swung the other to Hank. Hank grasped it and carefully began to pull -himself forward so he could reach the edge of the ice-boat. A very -little help, from a person on a solid place, will allow a person in the -water to lift himself up. The water buoys him, so to speak. You boys who -have been in swimming know that if you keep low in the water you can -support yourself by merely placing one finger on the edge of a pier or a boat.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i051.jpg" alt="Sammy tossed the three straps, fastened together" /></div> - -<p class="bold">Sammy tossed the three straps, fastened together.</p> - -<p>It was so with Hank. Slowly, by means of the straps, he was pulled up -until he could grasp the ice-boat.</p> - -<p>"I—I'm all right now," he panted. "Get after Jim!"</p> - -<p>He released his hold of the strap, and it was tossed to Jim. And not any -too soon, either, for Jim could not hold on much longer. He was weak -from the cold.</p> - -<p>But he, too, was soon safely towed to a place where he could grasp the -half-submerged ice-boat. All three was now comparatively safe.</p> - -<p>"Now look out!" called Jed, as he threw back to Tommy<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span> the buckled -straps. "I'm going to work my way to the solid ice, and you two fellows -follow. Can you do it?"</p> - -<p>"We've got to!" cried Jim, desperately.</p> - -<p>"Go ahead—I'm with you!" exclaimed Hank.</p> - -<p>Slowly Jed edged his way to where the stern of the ice-boat rested on -the solid, frozen surface. In a few seconds he was in safety, though he -was wet and shivering, and his clothes were beginning to freeze to him.</p> - -<p>"Come on!" he called to Hank and Jim, and they followed, but more -slowly, for they were quite exhausted. But soon they, too, were safe.</p> - -<p>"Oh, I'm so glad!" cried Sammy Brown.</p> - -<p>"So am I!" echoed his two chums.</p> - -<p>"And maybe we aren't also, youngsters!" chattered Jed, "We won't forget -this on your part!"</p> - -<p>"I should s-s-s-say n-n-n-not!" stammered Hank. "Those straps saved our -lives!"</p> - -<p>"Well, you'd better run home as soon as you can," advised Frank, "or -you'll catch your death of cold."</p> - -<p>"That's good advice," said Jed. "Come on. We can leave the ice-boat -where it is for a while. I'm going to run and see if I can get warmed -up. See you later, Sammy!"</p> - -<p>He set off on a trot toward shore, his two soaked friends following. -Sammy and his chums remained to look at the ice-boat. Some men and boys -came up then, too late, however, to help in the rescue. Then the men got -ropes and pulled the ice-boat up on the hard surface, whence it was -hauled to where it was kept tied up. Some of the ropes had broken, so -that it could not be sailed.</p> - -<p>"Sort of a queer accident," remarked Jerry Grow, who, with his dog -Prince, had come up with the crowd. "Those fellows could have sailed -almost anywhere else on Rainbow Lake and not gone through. But they had -to pick out a spot<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span> over a spring, where it never freezes very thick, -and of course they went through. There ought to be a mark put up here to -warn ice-boats and skaters to keep off."</p> - -<p>"We'll put one up," said Sammy, and a few days later they did mark the -danger spot in the ice. It had frozen over again, and could not have -been noticed except for the red box which Sammy and his chums placed -there. Thus further accidents were avoided.</p> - -<p>As for Jed and his companions, prompt action saved them from anything -worse than slight colds. They got home, took hot baths, drank plenty of -hot lemonade and, in a day or so, were out again.</p> - -<p>It appeared that the three larger boys had bought the ice-boat at -second-hand from a man in another town. It was the first time they had -tried it that they sailed over the thin ice, and went in.</p> - -<p>"But it won't happen again," said Jed to Sammy, when he and Jim and Hank -again met the three chums. "Thanks to you chaps we'll know where the -danger spot is now."</p> - -<p>"And thanks to them that we're not down there under the ice now," added -Hank, with a slight shiver.</p> - -<p>"That's right," chimed in Jim. "Say, any time you boys want a ride in -our ice-boat, let us know."</p> - -<p>"Sure enough!" exclaimed Jed. "Maybe you fellows would like to take a -sail. It's perfectly safe on the lake now, and we've fixed the boat -where she was broken that day."</p> - -<p>"Is the ice safe?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Sure," answered Jim. "It's frozen ever so much thicker than it was the -day we went out, and besides, we won't go near the danger spot. Don't -you want to come for a trip?"</p> - -<p>"Fellows, I've an idea!" cried Sammy, looking at his chums.</p> - -<p>"What, another?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span></p><p>"Yes," went on Sammy, with a grin. "This is a fine chance for us. -Christmas vacation starts next week. Why can't we go to Pine Island on -the ice-boat, camp there a few days with Mr. Jessup, and have Jed come -back for us—that is if he will?" and he looked at the former bully.</p> - -<p>"Of course we'll come for you!" he exclaimed. "We'd do anything for you -boys. We'll take you to Pine Island any time you say!"</p> - -<p>"Then it's all settled!" spoke Sammy, though it was far from that. -"We'll go camping with Mr. Jessup, and—we'll find out the secret of the -old hermit," he added in a whisper to his chums.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER VII</span> <span class="smaller">AT CAMP MYSTERY</span></h2> - -<p>"Sammy, do you really think we can do it?"</p> - -<p>"How did you happen to think of it?"</p> - -<p>Thus Frank and Bob questioned Sammy as they walked away from Jed and the -larger boys, after getting the promise of the use of the ice-boat any -time they wanted it.</p> - -<p>"Of course I think we can do it," answered Sammy. "And I don't just know -how I happened to think of it, except that I knew if we did go camping -on Pine Island we'd have to take some extra clothes with us, and maybe -something to eat, and we couldn't very well do that and skate. So I -thought of the ice-boat. It'll hold a lot."</p> - -<p>"It's a fine idea!" exclaimed Frank. "Now the next thing is to see if -our folks will let us go."</p> - -<p>The boys were a little worried about that part of the program. True, -they had been in a number of adventures of late, and their parents had -not objected to their going off on several trips during the Summer; -trips, too, that kept them away over night.</p> - -<p>But now it was Winter, and sleeping away from their warm beds might mean -severe colds, if nothing worse. So all three of the boys were a bit -doubtful about being allowed to go.</p> - -<p>"I'll tell you what let's do," proposed Sammy.</p> - -<p>"What?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span></p><p>"Let's go see Mrs. Blake," he went on. "We'll tell her we want to go up -and call on her brother. She said he'd be glad to have us, and we'll get -her to ask our folks if we can't go. They'll be sure to let us then."</p> - -<p>"Good idea, Sammy!" cried Frank.</p> - -<p>"I believe that will work!" declared Bob, slyly sticking out his foot to -trip up Sammy. But the latter was too quick for him, and it was Bob -himself who went down in a snowbank.</p> - -<p>"I—I'll wash your face for that!" he cried, as he scrambled to his feet -and made a rush for Sammy. But at that instant old Mr. Dolby, popularly -called a miser, came unexpectedly along, and Bob ran full tilt into him, -knocking him down.</p> - -<p>"Whew!" whistled Frank. "Now you have gone and done it!"</p> - -<p>The miserly old man struggled to his feet. All the boys were afraid to -go near to help him, for fear he would use his cane on them.</p> - -<p>"Ah, ha!" he spluttered as he got up, brushing the snow from his -clothes. "Ah, ha! Up to your old tricks again; are you? Knocking folks -down! I'll fix you for this! I'll have you all arrested, that's what I -will!"</p> - -<p>He shook his cane at the frightened boys.</p> - -<p>"I—I didn't mean to!" faltered Bob, as he picked up the angry man's hat -and gave it to him.</p> - -<p>"Didn't mean to! Humph! That's what ye allers say! But I'll have the law -on ye jest the same! I'll have ye all arrested! Look at my hat—all -snow!"</p> - -<p>"It'll brush off," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Hold your tongue! Don't speak to me!" snapped the angry man, as he -stalked off down the street. "I'll attend to your cases."</p> - -<p>For a moment the three chums remained looking after him.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span> Then, as he -noted the direction taken by the miser, Frank said anxiously:</p> - -<p>"He's going toward the police station. Maybe he will have us arrested."</p> - -<p>"He can't have you two taken in," said Bob. "I'm the only one that -knocked him down."</p> - -<p>"Huh! S'pose we'd let you stand it all?" demanded Sammy. "We'll all -stick together. But come on. There's no use waiting for trouble. If he -does make a complaint let the officer find us. I'm going home and ask my -mother if I can go to Pine Island."</p> - -<p>He turned aside, but stopped a moment later to pick up a paper from the -snow. He unfolded it and exclaimed:</p> - -<p>"Why! it's a check—a check for ten dollars, and it's for Mr. Dolby! He -must have dropped it."</p> - -<p>"Say! This is just the thing!" cried Frank, with ready wit. "Let's run -and give it to him. Maybe he won't be mad then."</p> - -<p>There was no need to race after the old miser, for a moment later he -turned the corner, coming toward the boys. He seemed very much in a -hurry, and quite excited.</p> - -<p>"Have you found it? Did I drop it here? If you boys have found it and -don't give it up—" he spluttered.</p> - -<p>"Is this it?" asked Sammy quickly, holding out the check.</p> - -<p>The miser fairly snatched it from the boy's grasp.</p> - -<p>"That's it! Where'd you get it? You must have took it from my pocket -when you knocked me down!" the peevish man exclaimed.</p> - -<p>"We did not!" cried Sammy, in righteous anger. "We found it in the snow -where it fell. And knocking you down was an accident."</p> - -<p>Perhaps the miser realized this, or perhaps the joy at <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span>finding the ten -dollar check he thought he had lost made him more humane. At any rate he -growled out:</p> - -<p>"Well, maybe you couldn't help it. But you boys shouldn't be so rough. I -won't have you arrested this time, but I will next. I'm an old man, and -I can't stand bein' knocked around rough-like. Here—here's a penny for -you for findin' my check," and he fumbled in an old wallet.</p> - -<p>"No, thank you!" exclaimed Sammy, turning aside. "We don't want any -reward."</p> - -<p>"Oh, all right," said the miser, and with a sigh of relief he put the -cent back in his purse. "Boys have too much money now-a-days as it is."</p> - -<p>He shuffled off, followed by the indignant glances of the lads.</p> - -<p>"Isn't he the limit!" murmured Frank.</p> - -<p>"He sure is," agreed Bob.</p> - -<p>"You want to stop your fooling, Bob," advised Sammy. "You nearly got us -into trouble."</p> - -<p>"All right—I'll be good," promised the fun-loving Bob. But his chums -knew that it would be only for a short time at best. However, they were -used to it now.</p> - -<p>The three soon forgot the little happening with the miser, in their -hurry to get home and find out if they could go camping on Pine Island. -School would close for Christmas in a day or so, and there was much to -do to get ready.</p> - -<p>It was no easy matter for the boys to get their parents' consent to the -trip. They had to "tease" very hard. But their plan of getting Mrs. -Blake to put in a good word for them was not in vain.</p> - -<p>"Of course you ought to let the boys go," she said, when she called in -turn on Mrs. Bouncer, Mrs. Brown and Mrs. Haven. "My brother will be -delighted to see them, and he'll take the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span> best of care of them. It will -do them good. They're only boys once, and they have studied well this -term."</p> - -<p>So it came about that permission was given. The boys were to take along -plenty of warm clothing. As for food, Mrs. Blake said her brother had -plenty in his cabin. She had written that the boys were coming, and he -had laid in a good stock of provisions.</p> - -<p>"Hurray!" cried Sammy, when the matter was settled, "we can go!"</p> - -<p>Arrangements were made, and Jed and his larger chums promised to take -the three boys to the island on the ice-boat. The lake was frozen over -thickly now, and there was no danger.</p> - -<p>School closed, Christmas came, with all its joys, and two days after the -holiday the little party of three, in charge of the older boys, set off -on the ice-boat.</p> - -<p>It was a fine sunny day, though cold, and there was a good wind, so they -were only a comparatively short time in getting to the upper end of Pine -Island. As they neared the dock in front of the cabin where Mr. Jessup -had his camp, Sammy and his chums kept a bright lookout. None of them -admitted as much, but they were all thinking they might see the -mysterious hermit.</p> - -<p>"There's your friend, I guess," said Jed, as the ice-boat came up into -the wind, and headed for the dock. "That's Mr. Jessup waving to you. I -know him."</p> - -<p>A tall man, with a gun under his arm, was standing on the edge of the -little pier that extended out into the frozen lake.</p> - -<p>"Yes, that's him," said Sammy, who knew the hunter from the way in which -Mrs. Blake had described her brother.</p> - -<p>"I wish we were you chaps," spoke Jim Eaton. "You'll have no end of good -times here."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span></p><p>"That's what they will," added Hank.</p> - -<p>But neither they, nor Sammy and his chums, dreamed of the queer, as well -as good, times in store.</p> - -<p>The ice-boat came to a stop, the three small boys got off, and the craft -veered away again.</p> - -<p>"Well, boys, glad to see you!" called Mr. Jessup, cordially as he met -them. "Welcome to Camp Mystery!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER VIII</span> <span class="smaller">THE OLD MANSION</span></h2> - -<p>Sammy Brown and his chums looked queerly at one another. Then they -glanced at Mr. Jessup. He smiled as he peered at them from under his -shaggy eyebrows.</p> - -<p>"Camp Mystery, did you say?" asked Sammy, wonderingly.</p> - -<p>"That's what I said," was the answer. "But don't get frightened, I don't -believe the mystery will hurt you."</p> - -<p>"Is there really a mystery?" asked Sammy, eagerly. "Is there a—a -ghost—or something like that?"</p> - -<p>Mr. Jessup laughed heartily.</p> - -<p>"No need to ask your name," he chuckled. "You're Sammy Brown? My sister -told me all about you."</p> - -<p>Sammy blushed.</p> - -<p>"Well—er—well," he stammered, "I only thought——"</p> - -<p>"No harm done at all!" went on the hunter, still laughing. "My sister -said one of you boys was always on the lookout for something strange, -like buried treasure, or a lost diamond mine. Well, we haven't got -either of those things on this end of Pine Island, whatever they may -have down below. But that's how I guessed your name, Sammy.</p> - -<p>"And now let me see, you ought to be Bob Bouncer, by rights," and he -looked at Bob with his head on one side. "How about it?"</p> - -<p>"That's my name," admitted the owner of it.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span></p><p>"I thought so. Then of course, as you're the only one left," he said to -Frank, "you're Mr. Haven's son."</p> - -<p>"How did you guess my name?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, my sister said Bob was the one with a twinkle in his eye that meant -mischief. You've got it, so you're him. I hope you don't cut-up too -much. I don't mind sitting down on a pin once in a while, but I don't -like to find mud turtles in my bed——"</p> - -<p>"I don't do any of those things!" cried Bob, in confusion.</p> - -<p>"No, I s'pose you don't, but it's just as well to warn you," and by the -merry twinkle in Mr. Jessup's eyes the boys knew he was only joking.</p> - -<p>"Now then," he went on, "forward for Camp Mystery! Got all your -luggage?"</p> - -<p>"All we need, I guess," answered Sammy. Each of the boys had a -good-sized valise. "But what makes you call your place Camp Mystery?" -asked the lad. "Your sister didn't say anything about that."</p> - -<p>"No, for it's only lately that I've had occasion to call it that. You -see——"</p> - -<p>But Mr. Jessup was interrupted by a crashing sound in the underbrush at -one side of the path, and from the bushes there was shaken down a shower -of the light snow that had fallen the night before.</p> - -<p>"Look out!" cried Frank, starting back.</p> - -<p>"Maybe it's him!" added Bob.</p> - -<p>"Don't run!" advised Sammy.</p> - -<p>Mr. Jessup stared in surprise at the three lads, but before he could ask -them the reason for their strange remarks there burst out from the -bushes a fine hunting dog, who ran straight for the man, wagging his -tail in delight.</p> - -<p>"Oh, so there you are, Maybe!" exclaimed Mr. Jessup. "I was just -wondering what had become of you."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span></p><p>"Is that your dog?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Did he make that noise?" inquired Frank.</p> - -<p>"Yes. What did you think it was—a ghost?" Mr. Jessup wanted to know. -Once more he looked strangely at the boys.</p> - -<p>"We—we thought," began Bob, and then he glanced at Sammy, as if asking -him to explain the thoughts of his chums.</p> - -<p>"Oh, you thought maybe it was the mystery; is that it?" Mr. Jessup -wanted to know. "No, it isn't that. The mystery, if that's what I am to -call it, doesn't make that much noise. It's a very quiet sort of a -mystery; the one in my camp."</p> - -<p>The boys were puzzled. Clearly there was more than one queer thing, to -be gotten to the bottom of, on Pine Island.</p> - -<p>The dog was frisking about, soon making friends with the boys.</p> - -<p>"Quiet now, Maybe," cautioned the hunter. "We can't scare up anything -to-day. Down, sir!"</p> - -<p>"Is—is his name Maybe?" asked Bob, thinking there might be a joke -attached to the animal's title.</p> - -<p>"It is," said Mr. Jessup. "You see I call him Maybe because when we go -out hunting—he and I—maybe we'll have luck, and—maybe we won't. It's -been mostly not, of late, though maybe my luck will change, now that you -boys have come.</p> - -<p>"But come. Tell me what you thought it was when you heard the dog make a -noise in the bushes."</p> - -<p>"And then will you tell us what the mystery is?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Of course. I'll tell you first, if you like. To be brief I've been -missing things from my camp—food mostly, though the other night one of -my best blankets was taken. And the funny part of it is that I can't get -a trace of the thief. Things disappear when I'm away from camp, and -sometimes when I'm asleep. It's all quite strange, so that's why I call -this Camp<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span> Mystery. I wish I could find out who is at the bottom of it."</p> - -<p>Sammy was eager to relate his story now.</p> - -<p>"Perhaps we can tell you!" he eagerly exclaimed, when Mr. Jessup nodded -to show that he had finished. "It must be the hermit who's taking your -things."</p> - -<p>If he and his chums expected Mr. Jessup to show surprise at the mention -of the hermit they were disappointed. Mr. Jessup only shook his head.</p> - -<p>"So you've seen him, too," he murmured. "He's showing himself more often -of late. I hope he doesn't get into trouble."</p> - -<p>"Who?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"The hermit."</p> - -<p>"Oh, then you know him?" asked Sammy. His expected surprise had amounted -to nothing. He was rather disappointed.</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, I know him," admitted the hunter, "but that isn't saying I -know what he's up to. That part is queer, I admit."</p> - -<p>"Who is he?" asked Sammy, and he briefly told how they had encountered -the strange old man, with his white hair and beard.</p> - -<p>"Well, his name is Franklin Addison," answered Mr. Jessup, "and he has -been here for some time. Just when he came I don't remember, but I know -I ran across him one day, and he ordered me off the island. Of course I -didn't go, owning considerable land here. So I stood my ground, and -explained matters.</p> - -<p>"Then Mr. Addison grew more reasonable. He told me he had come to live -here to be away from the world, and he showed me a little hut he had -made for himself, on a small piece of land he said was his. A poor -enough place it is, but he seems to like it. Since then, though we -haven't met often, we have been better friends. I let him alone, and he -lets me alone. He lives about a mile from here, in a lonesome place.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span></p><p>"What he is doing here I can't make out. Maybe he's here for his -health. There are some folks, you know, who believe in getting off alone -like that, and living as much out of doors as they can."</p> - -<p>"I thought maybe he was the mystery," explained Sammy, "and that he had -been taking your things."</p> - -<p>"No," answered the hunter, "Mr. Addison wouldn't do a thing like that. -He has often asked me for food, and I have given it to him. Then again -he has given me money to buy things for him when I go to the mainland. -He isn't the thief, I'm sure."</p> - -<p>"Maybe it's a bear—or some wild animal," suggested Bob.</p> - -<p>"I wish it was!" exclaimed the hunter. "If it was maybe we could get -it—Maybe and I. But there are no animal tracks, and anyhow the biggest -beasts here on Pine Island now are foxes. No you'll have to guess again, -boys."</p> - -<p>"Well, it will give us something to look up," said Sammy. "We can solve -that mystery, and the one about the hermit, too."</p> - -<p>He was quite delighted over the prospect, as his chums could easily tell -by the light in his eyes. Give Sammy a mystery, or put him on the trail -of buried treasure, be it ever so small, and he was happy.</p> - -<p>"Well, come on to Camp Mystery," suggested Mr. Jessup. "You must be -hungry—I know I am."</p> - -<p>With Maybe, the dog, running on ahead, and the hunter and the boys -bringing up in the rear, the little procession started off along the -snowy trail.</p> - -<p>They went on for perhaps a mile, when, through the trees, the boys -caught sight of a large house—a mansion in size.</p> - -<p>"Is that your cabin?" asked Sammy. "It's big!"</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i067.jpg" alt="Is that your cabin? asked Sammy" /></div> - -<p class="bold">"Is that your cabin?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"No, my shack can't compare with that in build," answered the hunter. -"That's an old deserted mansion. It used to be a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> sort of hotel, or -boarding house, but it hasn't been used as such in a good many years. It -didn't pay.</p> - -<p>"I'm a sort of care-taker of it, and I have one or two rooms fitted up -that I use when my shack gets filled. But the rest of the place is -deserted, except for the bats and rats."</p> - -<p>The boys came to a stop in front of the old house. It was bare and -gaunt, and looked lonesome. On most of the windows the sagging shutters -flapped dismally. Somehow there seemed an air of mystery about the -place. Sammy Brown's spirits rose.</p> - -<p>"Fellows!" he cried, "maybe the mystery is in here!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER IX</span> <span class="smaller">SAMMY'S QUEER FIND</span></h2> - -<p>"Ha! Ha!" laughed Mr. Jessup. "My sister was right about you, Sammy! -You're always on the lookout for something odd."</p> - -<p>Sammy was a little put out by the attention he had drawn to himself. But -for all of that, he was not going to back down.</p> - -<p>"Well," he said, "I only thought that if queer things had been going on -around your camp, Mr. Jessup, maybe the person who had been taking your -things would be hiding in here."</p> - -<p>"So you're sure it's a person, and not a ghost; eh?" asked the hunter, -with a smile.</p> - -<p>"I don't believe in ghosts," declared Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Good boy! Neither do I. But I'm sorry I can't agree with you that the -mystery is in this old mansion."</p> - -<p>"Why?" asked Sammy, who liked to stick to a point.</p> - -<p>"Because the hermit and I, so far as I know, are the only ones on this -part of the island. If there was anyone else here Maybe would have -routed him out long ago; wouldn't you, Maybe?"</p> - -<p>The dog barked, and wagged his tail.</p> - -<p>But Sammy Brown was not satisfied. The old mansion, that had been used -for a hotel, when the upper part of Pine Island had been a Summer -resort, looked strange enough to hide any sort of a mystery, and the boy -made up his mind he would get at the bottom of this one.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span></p><p>"We've got two things to do while we're here," Sammy told himself. "One -is to find out who has been taking Mr. Jessup's stuff, and the other is -to find out what the hermit is doing here."</p> - -<p>Instead of being worried over the seemingly hard work, Sammy Brown was -delighted. It gave him a chance to do something, and this always pleased -the lad.</p> - -<p>"Well," said Mr. Jessup, after a pause, "there's no need of staying here -unless you want to. Better come on to my cabin, and we'll have a meal. -Then you can unpack, and get your bearings. Are you warm enough?"</p> - -<p>"Oh, yes, indeed!" exclaimed Frank. "Mother made me put on my heavy -clothes."</p> - -<p>"Well, it's a good idea, for it often gets quite chilly on the island. -Now then, forward march!"</p> - -<p>Sammy hung back a little.</p> - -<p>"What's the matter?" asked Mr. Jessup, looking at him. "Do you see -anything?"</p> - -<p>"No," was the answer, "but I'd like a chance to go through that deserted -mansion."</p> - -<p>"Oh, you'll get it all right enough," the hunter promised him. "I've got -to straighten up the few rooms I use in a day or so, and you boys can -help.</p> - -<p>"You see," he explained, "I'm expecting a company of gentlemen up in -about two weeks to stay a few days, and there'll be more of them than I -can keep in my cabin. So I've got to use a few rooms in the old mansion. -I'll have to clean them up a bit though, first."</p> - -<p>"Maybe we'll be in the way then," suggested Bob.</p> - -<p>"Bless your heart, no! They're in no hurry to come, and I'm going to -give you boys a good time first, just as I promised my sister I would. -You did her a good turn, and this is the only way I can pay you back.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span></p><p>"So don't worry. Stay as long as you like, and you'll have all the -chance you want, Sammy, to go through the old house. You won't find -anything, though, I'll wager."</p> - -<p>Sammy said nothing, but he made up his mind that if there was anything -in the deserted mansion that would solve the mystery he would find it.</p> - -<p>A short time later Mr. Jessup's cabin was reached. It stood in the midst -of a grove of trees, and through them a glimpse could be had of the -frozen lake. This part of the island was separated from the portion -where the boys had played Robinson Crusoe by a wide stretch of -marshland.</p> - -<p>"Which way is the hermit's cabin from here?" asked Sammy, when he and -his chums had put away the clothes they had brought in their satchels.</p> - -<p>"Right back of here," answered Mr. Jessup. "But I wouldn't advise you to -try to find it alone. There's a bad, swampy bog near it, and you might -get mired."</p> - -<p>"Wouldn't it be frozen over now?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"No; and that's the funny part of it. That bog never freezes, even in -the coldest weather. It's down in a sort of valley, and it's protected. -So keep away from there unless I'm with you. There's another reason, -too, for not looking up Mr. Addison."</p> - -<p>"What is it?" asked Sammy, while the other boys waited eagerly for the -answer.</p> - -<p>"Well, he's a queer sort of man," went on Mr. Jessup. "He doesn't like -company, and he even objects to me, sometimes, though I seldom bother -him. Just how he would take to you boys I don't know."</p> - -<p>"He didn't take to us at all the first time he saw us," spoke Bob.</p> - -<p>"I should say not!" cried Frank. "He ordered us away."</p> - -<p>"And we went—in a hurry," added Sammy.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span></p><p>"Yes," remarked the hunter, with a smile. "Then I'd give him a wide -berth. I don't just know what his rights are on this island. I know he -doesn't bother me, and he keeps off my land, except when he wants to -borrow something, or have me buy food for him. So I don't bother him, -and I'd advise you boys to do the same."</p> - -<p>"All right," answered Sammy. He did not exactly promise, and the truth -of the matter was that he made up his mind to find out more about the -queer hermit, as well as about the mystery and the deserted mansion, as -soon as he could.</p> - -<p>And his chums felt the same way.</p> - -<p>"Well, anyhow, we're here!" exclaimed Sammy, a little later, while they -sat about a campfire in front of the cabin, and ate the meal which Mr. -Jessup got ready. "We're here, and we're going to have some fun!"</p> - -<p>"That's what we are!" cried Frank. "What can we do first?"</p> - -<p>"Well, I'm going to do a little hunting for rabbits this afternoon," -said Mr. Jessup. "You boys can come along, if you like."</p> - -<p>"Fine!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"I wish we had guns and could hunt," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"You're a bit too young for firearms," said the hunter. "Later on, when -you grow up, you can have 'em, and I'll show you how to shoot."</p> - -<p>With this the boys had to be content, though it must be confessed they -looked on with eager and envious eyes while Mr. Jessup got his gun ready -for the little expedition.</p> - -<p>Maybe, the dog, as soon as he saw the preparations, frisked about in -delight. He barked, and ran to and fro from the cabin, as if asking -everyone to hurry.</p> - -<p>"All right, old fellow," said Mr. Jessup, soothingly. "We'll soon be -with you."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span></p><p>Pine Island, as I have said, was a large one in the midst of Rainbow -Lake. Years before, many years, when only the Indians roved about that -part of the country, it had been part of the main land, so scientists -said. They had located a reef in the lake, and their explanation was, -that, through the raising of the waters of the lake, the point of land -became surrounded by water, and was made into an island.</p> - -<p>It had happened suddenly, and many large, wild animals, as well as some -smaller ones, had been trapped there. In time the wild animals, such as -deer and bears, had been killed off, and were never replenished. But the -small game, such as rabbits, squirrels, opossums and raccoons, were -still rather plentiful. The island was protected by game laws, now, so -that the supply was not killed off.</p> - -<p>Then, too, there was some valuable timber on the island, and Mr. Jessup -cut that in the Summer when there was no hunting. He floated it down to -Fairview where he sold it.</p> - -<p>Off through the snow-covered woods started Mr. Jessup and the boys, with -Maybe frisking about here and there, trying to scare up a rabbit or a -partridge for his master to shoot. For a time luck was poor, and then -some pheasants were flushed, and Mr. Jessup brought down two fat ones.</p> - -<p>"Hurray!" cried Bob. "Now we'll have a fine dinner!"</p> - -<p>Later on the hunter got two fine rabbits, and oh! how the boys wished -they were big enough to have guns!</p> - -<p>"I'm coming up here every hunting season, as soon as I'm old enough to -shoot!" cried Frank.</p> - -<p>"So am I!" exclaimed Sammy and Bob.</p> - -<p>As he did not shoot game to sell, and as he had enough for present -needs, Mr. Jessup, as all good hunters do in such cases, ceased the use -of his gun. With his rabbits and pheasants on his back he led the boys -on the return trip. As they came to the old mansion, Sammy asked:</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span></p><p>"Could we go in now, Mr. Jessup, and look around?"</p> - -<p>"I guess so," he answered. "But don't stay too late. It gets dark early -now, you know. I'll keep on to my cabin."</p> - -<p>Eagerly the boys entered the old deserted house, Mr. Jessup letting them -take his key. As he had said, they found several rooms fitted up with -beds, and a few pieces of furniture. These were the apartments used by -those of the hunting parties who could not find bunks in the cabin.</p> - -<p>"Now let's begin at the top of the house, and work down," proposed -Sammy, when they had looked about the lower floor. "Maybe we can find -something of the mystery."</p> - -<p>"Maybe—the dog—yes," laughed Bob.</p> - -<p>"Oh, you just wait!" exclaimed Sammy. "I'll find something yet."</p> - -<p>But it did not seem that he was going to, at first. Room after room was -deserted, the once gay wallpaper hanging in mouldy strips. Broken -shutters flapped in the wind, and there was ruin on all sides. In some -rooms were bits of broken furniture, and in others only heaps of -rubbish.</p> - -<p>"I shouldn't like to stay here," said Bob, with a little shiver.</p> - -<p>"Me, either," added Frank.</p> - -<p>They were up in the top story now, and had found nothing.</p> - -<p>"Well, I suppose we may as well go down," spoke Sammy, in disappointed -tones. "There's nothing here."</p> - -<p>"Unless it's in one of those secret rooms you read about," said Bob. -"This mansion looks old enough to have one of those."</p> - -<p>Sammy did not reply. He was looking at a spot on the wall, and suddenly -he put forth his hand and pressed on a carved bit of moulding.</p> - -<p>To his surprise, as well as to the surprise of his chums, the wall -seemed to slide away. There was a rumbling sound, and a hole came into -view.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span></p><p>Then, as the boys' eyes became used to the gloom, they saw that they -were looking into a room of the existence of which they had never -guessed.</p> - -<p>"Look!" cried Bob excitedly. "Sammy's found it—the secret room!"</p> - -<p>"Yes, and see what's in it!" cried Sammy, as he pointed to a heap of -odd-looking objects in one corner. "Fellows, maybe this is the mystery!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER X</span> <span class="smaller">THE MYSTERIOUS ROOM</span></h2> - -<p>The boys hung back for a moment on the threshold of the room Sammy had -so strangely discovered. Truth to tell they were a little afraid to -enter, and no one could have blamed them. For surely there were some -queer looking objects in the secret apartment.</p> - -<p>That it was a secret room, intended to be hidden from the ordinary -person going through the old house, was plain. As one looked at the -wall, before Sammy had pushed on what must have been a secret spring, it -did not seem different from the rest of the building. There had been a -little piece of carved wood sticking out, and this must have worked on -some springs and levers to slide back the hidden door.</p> - -<p>"Say, this is great!" cried Sammy, delighted at his discovery.</p> - -<p>"It sure is," agreed Bob. "How'd you come to do it?"</p> - -<p>"I just happened to," answered Sammy. "I saw that carved wood bulging -out, and it looked as though it was meant to press on. So I did."</p> - -<p>"You're a great one!" cried Frank. "You're all the time talking about -finding something mysterious, but it never before amounted to anything. -This time you did hit it, Sammy Brown!"</p> - -<p>"And I guess you fellows won't laugh at me any more; will you?"</p> - -<p>"I won't," said Bob, with a sigh, wishing he had discovered the secret -room.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span></p><p>"And look what's in there, fellows!" went on Sammy. "Maybe now we can -find out how and who has been taking Mr. Jessup's stuff!"</p> - -<p>There was indeed an odd collection of things in the secret room. Besides -a bed, table and some chairs, there was on the floor, and on the -wall-shelves, some tubes, with shining pieces of glass in the ends. -There were tin boxes, springs, long pieces of wire, black wooden boxes, -and many other strange things. One of the tubes, with a glass in the -end, seemed to be pointed directly at the boys, like some strange gun.</p> - -<p>"Come on, let's go in!" urged Sammy. "Let's see what those things are."</p> - -<p>For a moment his two chums looked at him, and then Frank said:</p> - -<p>"Do you think it's safe to go in?"</p> - -<p>"Why not?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Well, that door might suddenly slide shut while we were in there, or -there might be a false bottom to the floor, and we'd drop through, or -something like that," suggested Bob.</p> - -<p>"Huh! You're as bad as you say I am, in thinking up things!" cried -Sammy. "I say let's go in. We can put a stick, or something, across the -sliding door, so that can't go shut on us."</p> - -<p>"Well, maybe that's all right," agreed Bob. "But it sure would be hard -luck if we got caught in here. No one would ever know where to find us."</p> - -<p>"That's right," admitted Sammy, and, for a second or two, he was almost -ready to give up the adventure.</p> - -<p>But his desire to see what the strange things were was so strong that he -decided, by taking care, it would be all right.</p> - -<p>"Oh, come on, fellows," he exclaimed. "Let's take a chance! I'll fix the -door."</p> - -<p>They found a piece of a broken shutter which they wedged<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span> across the -sliding doorway so that, even if they, or someone else, accidentally -touched the hidden spring which sent the door to and fro, they would not -be trapped.</p> - -<p>"There, I guess that's all right," cried Sammy. "Now come on in!"</p> - -<p>But Bob still hung back, though Sammy stepped across the door sill.</p> - -<p>"Well, what's the matter now?" asked the discoverer of the hidden room.</p> - -<p>"I'm thinking that the floor might give way," faltered Bob.</p> - -<p>"Nonsense!" exclaimed Frank, taking sides with Sammy. "It must be solid, -or how would it hold up the tables, chairs and the other things? I'm -going in."</p> - -<p>Bob would not be left behind, in the mysterious old house, so he -followed his chums into the room. They advanced cautiously, and listened -closely. There was no clicking sound, that might tell of hidden -machinery.</p> - -<p>"Pshaw! It's all right!" exclaimed Sammy, presently. "Now to see what -those things are."</p> - -<p>"Who do you s'pose put 'em there?" asked Frank, as they advanced toward -the odd collection of things on the table.</p> - -<p>"Counterfeiters!" exclaimed Sammy, promptly.</p> - -<p>"Counterfeiters!" cried Frank. "What do you mean?"</p> - -<p>"Just what I said," answered Sammy, with a calm smile, as though he knew -it all. "This is a hidden place where some men have been making false -coins, and maybe bad paper money too."</p> - -<p>"You mean money that's no good?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Sure," replied Sammy. "Money that looks good, but which -isn't—counterfeit money. I've read a lot about it. Fellows, we have -discovered a counterfeiters' den!"</p> - -<p>Sammy's chums looked rather frightened. It did seem as though they had -stumbled upon some strange "den."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span></p><p>"Well, if counterfeiters work here, where are they, and where is some -of the false money?" asked Bob. "I'd like to see some."</p> - -<p>"Pooh! You don't s'pose they'd leave it around loose; do you?" asked -Sammy. "They go out to spend it. That's probably where they are now. -We'd better hurry and look around, and then we can go back to town and -tell the police!"</p> - -<p>Frank looked as though he did not quite agree with Sammy. It was often -this way with the excitable small chap. He saw some things and imagined -the rest. But in this case it was different. He had really discovered a -secret room, and this was more than his chums had done. Perhaps, after -all, he was right about the counterfeiters.</p> - -<p>The boys advanced farther into the room. A nearer view of the strange -tubes, with the glass in the ends, showed the latter to be large and -bulging, like the lens of a bull's-eye lantern, or an automobile lamp. -Attached to the tubes were black boxes, with a number of springs and -levers fastened to them.</p> - -<p>"Ha! I know what these are!" cried Frank. "They're telescopes, that's -what they are. This isn't a counterfeiters' place at all. It's where one -of those men live who look at the stars—astro—astor—Oh, you know what -I mean," he added quickly.</p> - -<p>"Astronomers," said Bob. "That's what it is, Sammy."</p> - -<p>"It is not!" declared Sammy, quickly, bound not to give up his -sensational idea. "Those may be telescopes all right, but if they are, -the counterfeiters use them to look and see if the police are coming."</p> - -<p>"Say, maybe that's right," agreed Frank, with a look of admiration at -Sammy. "I never thought of that."</p> - -<p>"Pooh! I did!" exclaimed the lad who had found the secret room. He was -not going to lose any chance of showing<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span> off, now that he had the -opportunity. "That's what they are—telescopes for spying out when the -counterfeiters are at work."</p> - -<p>There were several small windows in the secret room, and they were -rather high up from the floor. In fact Sammy and his chums had to drag -out boxes to stand on, in order to see above the sills.</p> - -<p>They paused a moment in looking over the strange apparatus to glance at -the furniture in the room. As I have said, there was a bed, a table and -several chairs. The bed did not look very nice, being covered with old -blankets and some cut-up bags for covers. But it appeared to have been -slept in, and was not actually dirty. In fact it was no worse than the -place where the boys had slept when they were wrecked on the other end -of Pine Island in the Summer.</p> - -<p>"I wonder if they live here all the while?" spoke Bob.</p> - -<p>"I guess they stay here when they're not away getting rid of the bad -money," said Sammy. "They may come back any minute. We'd better be -getting out of here!"</p> - -<p>"Let's look around a little more," proposed Bob, who was getting braver -now. "What can you see from the windows?"</p> - -<p>The boys looked out. The windows of the secret room gave a view of only -a dense mass of trees, and it was plain that this was the reason no one -had ever found the apartment before. That side of the old mansion was -opposite a deep and seldom-visited part of the woods.</p> - -<p>"Well, we'll look at the counterfeiting machinery a little more, and -then we'll go," suggested Sammy. "We'd better tell Mr. Jessup about -this, and he can get the police after these fellows."</p> - -<p>This seemed good advice to his chums, and they went back again to the -table and shelves where the apparatus was spread out. They now examined -it all more closely.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span></p><p>"Better not touch anything," advised Sammy, as Bob put out his hand to -examine one of the tubes with glass in the end.</p> - -<p>"Why not?" was asked.</p> - -<p>"Because you might get a shock."</p> - -<p>"A shock? How do you make that out?"</p> - -<p>"Why there's some electric batteries attached to the things," said -Sammy, pointing out the dry cells in their red pasteboard boxes.</p> - -<p>"That's right," agreed Frank. "They're the same kind of batteries Jerry -Grow has in his motor-boat. And they can give you a fierce shock, too."</p> - -<p>"What, those little things?" asked Bob, in surprise.</p> - -<p>"Sure," spoke Sammy. "You see the batteries aren't so strong in -themselves, but when you run the current through a production coil——"</p> - -<p>"Induction coil—not production," corrected Frank.</p> - -<p>"Well, induction coil then," went on Sammy. "When the current from the -electric battery goes through that, it gets stronger, and it sure does -hurt."</p> - -<p>"I know it does," agreed Bob, "for I got stung once on Jerry's boat, -when he was putting in some new batteries. Oh, I won't touch these!"</p> - -<p>Look as they did at the strange apparatus, the boys could not understand -what it was for, unless, as Sammy said, it was used for making false -money. Of course the chums had never seen any machinery for that -purpose, and had no idea what was necessary. But Sammy's idea appealed -to them.</p> - -<p>"I guess we'd better be getting out now," said Frank, after a bit. "I -shouldn't like to be caught here."</p> - -<p>"Me either!" agreed Bob. "Let's go."</p> - -<p>The boys started out of the mysterious room, excited over their strange -find, Sammy in particular. This trip to Pine<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> Island was going to be -more sensational than their previous one. They were sure of that.</p> - -<p>"What'll we do about the door; leave it open?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"No, we'll close it," decided Sammy, "that is if we can. Then the -counterfeiters won't know we've been here, and they'll come back to -their den, and we can help the police capture them."</p> - -<p>"That's the way to talk!" cried Bob. "You're all right, Sammy!"</p> - -<p>And then something happened. How it came about none of the boys knew, -but Sammy admitted afterward that he must have touched one of the wires, -or springs.</p> - -<p>At any rate there was a blinding flash, a great cloud of white smoke -shot out, and a loud boom.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i085.jpg" alt="There was a blinding flash" /></div> - -<p class="bold">There was a blinding flash.</p> - -<p>"An explosion!" yelled Sammy.</p> - -<p>"They're shooting at us!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>"Come on—get out of here!" gasped Frank, as they made their way through -the blinding and choking vapor to where they imagined the secret door to be.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XI</span> <span class="smaller">THE STRANGE HERMIT</span></h2> - -<p>"Come on, fellows, this way!"</p> - -<p>"No, over this way!"</p> - -<p>"I tell you the door's here!"</p> - -<p>Thus cried Bob, Sammy and Frank as they stumbled about in the mysterious -smoke-filled room. They banged into the bed, tripped over chairs, and -slammed into the table.</p> - -<p>"Look out, don't go near those things again!" warned Sammy.</p> - -<p>"We won't—if we know it!" panted Frank. "Where is that door?"</p> - -<p>"Maybe—maybe the explosion slid it shut!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>This thought caused terror in the hearts of the boys until Sammy with a -joyful cry, shouted:</p> - -<p>"It's all right! Here's the door still open! Come on!"</p> - -<p>Out they rushed, following Sammy's lead, for the smoke had now cleared -away enough for them to see in the dim room.</p> - -<p>They never paused to take away the piece of broken shutter that held -open the secret sliding door, or panel in the wall. They had no desire, -now, to leave things as they had found them, in hopes that the -mysterious person, or persons, who used the strange room, would come -back, unsuspecting, and be caught. All the boys cared about now was to -get away.</p> - -<p>Down the attic stairs they rushed, and they never paused until they were -safely out of the old house. Then, some distance off, the fright left -them, and they halted to look back.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span></p><p>"What happened?" panted Sammy.</p> - -<p>"It was an explosion," decided Frank.</p> - -<p>"No, those counterfeiters must have come back and shot at us," gasped -Bob.</p> - -<p>"Go on! You're worse than Sammy," said Frank, who was more calm than his -chums. "It was some sort of explosion. Maybe it was powder the men left -there, or it might have been some of the chemicals they use, in whatever -they do, whether it's making bad money, or something else. Anyhow it was -just an explosion. There was no one in that room but ourselves."</p> - -<p>"Well, I guess that's right," agreed Bob, when he had thought it over a -bit. "But who exploded it?"</p> - -<p>"Maybe I did," admitted Sammy, slowly. "I know just before that flash -and puff came, I touched one of the wires on those telescope things. -There was a click, and it went off—all at once!"</p> - -<p>"I should say it did," spoke Frank. "It went off fast enough."</p> - -<p>"And there was an awful lot of smoke!" added Bob.</p> - -<p>"Well, I'm glad we're out of the place," said Sammy. "Come on, now, it's -getting late, and Mr. Jessup may be worried about us. We'd better go -tell him about what we found."</p> - -<p>"And then get the police after those counterfeiters," said Bob. "They -had no right to explode stuff at us that way."</p> - -<p>"Well, they may claim we had no right to go in their room," went on -Frank, "but I guess they won't—that is if we get them. Well, come on."</p> - -<p>"I'll tell you what let's do," proposed Sammy. "Let's see if we can -locate the windows of that room from the outside. We might want to point -out to Mr. Jessup where they are."</p> - -<p>"That's a good idea," agreed Frank.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span></p><p>But it could not be done, for the boys found it impossible to get -through the thick underbrush on that side of the old mansion. They might -have managed it in broad daylight, but it was now getting dark, and they -did not want to take any chances.</p> - -<p>"The best thing we can do," said Sammy, "is to go to Mr. Jessup right -away, and tell him about what happened. He'll know what's best to do."</p> - -<p>To this Frank and Bob had no objection, and with a last look at the -queer old house, the boys found the trail leading to Camp Mystery, and -hurried along it.</p> - -<p>On the way they talked over what they had seen and what had happened to -them. Try as they might, they could not explain it. Sammy was sure they -had discovered a counterfeiters' den, but neither Frank nor Bob would -admit that this was positively so, though they agreed that it all looked -very strange.</p> - -<p>Frank did not say so, but he kept thinking that so many queer things -which Sammy had discovered had turned out to be only commonplace after -all, that now he feared this one would, also. Still he had to admit that -the finding of the secret room was rather strange.</p> - -<p>"There's the cabin!" exclaimed Sammy, as they came in sight of it.</p> - -<p>"Yes, and there's Maybe, the dog, but I don't see any signs of Mr. -Jessup," spoke Bob.</p> - -<p>"I guess he's inside, getting supper," suggested Frank. "I hope he -is—I'm as hungry as one of the bears that used to live on Pine Island."</p> - -<p>"So am I," admitted Bob. "I'd like some nice hot pancakes, the kind Mr. -Jessup makes, and some of his baked potatoes."</p> - -<p>"Don't talk about it—I'm so hungry!" laughed Frank.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span></p><p>They kept on toward the cabin. Maybe rushed out to meet them, barking -and wagging his tail, to show how glad he was to see them. But Mr. -Jessup did not appear.</p> - -<p>Somehow a sense of fear came over the boys. They did not know why, but -the strange experience they had just gone through had made them nervous, -and not seeing Mr. Jessup at once, added to their fears.</p> - -<p>"I wonder where he can be?" asked Sammy, looking around the cabin. There -was no sign of their friend.</p> - -<p>"Maybe he's off hunting," suggested Frank.</p> - -<p>"Why, he just came back from a trip," spoke Bob. "I guess you forgot -that."</p> - -<p>"I sure did," admitted Frank. "But so many things have happened in the -last hour that it's no wonder. There's the game he shot," and he pointed -to the rabbits and the birds.</p> - -<p>"Yes, and there's a note on them!" cried Sammy. "Fellows, it's for us. -Look it's addressed to the 'Fairview Boys.' I'll read it."</p> - -<p>Which he did quickly enough. The note said:</p> - -<blockquote><p>"Dear Boys: I have been called over to the mainland to see my -sister. She was taken suddenly ill. I will be back before long. -Don't worry, and get the best supper you can. I know you can cook it.</p> - -<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Peter Jessup.</span>"</p></blockquote> - -<p>For a moment the boys felt much disappointed, and not a little alarmed. -Then their spirits rose.</p> - -<p>"Well, it's too bad Mrs. Blake is sick," said Sammy, slowly, "but I -guess we can manage without Mr. Jessup. We sure can get up a good meal. -There's plenty of stuff."</p> - -<p>"And we'll have roast pheasant and stewed rabbit!" cried Bob, who was -fond of eating.</p> - -<p>"No, we'd better leave them until Mr. Jessup gets back,"<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span> suggested -Frank. "I don't believe he'd like us to touch his game. He'll probably -be back before it gets very late."</p> - -<p>"And maybe he'll be hungry too," said Bob. "We'll cook enough to save -him some."</p> - -<p>"Then let's get right at it!" suggested Sammy. "Those counterfeiters -will have to wait," and he laughed. All the boys were feeling better -now, especially since they were in their own camp. And if Mr. Jessup was -not there, they had good old dog Maybe, who frisked about, glad of the -company of the boys. It must have been hard for him to stay behind when -his master left.</p> - -<p>Sammy and his chums were soon busy over the meal. They had been camping -before, several times, and were getting to be quite expert. One made the -fire, another got the meat and potatoes ready, while Frank opened a can -of baked beans to warm in a frying pan over the stove, the fire being -made there instead of outside, though later the boys intended to kindle -a camp blaze in front of the cabin.</p> - -<p>"Well, this is something like!" exclaimed Sammy, as they sat about the -table, after supper, the lamp glowing on their shining faces.</p> - -<p>"That's right!" said Frank.</p> - -<p>"It's nice and cozy in here," agreed Bob.</p> - -<p>They had kindled a fire outside, and sat about that for a while, waiting -for the sound of Mr. Jessup's return. Then as it grew later, and colder, -they went inside.</p> - -<p>"He may not come until nearly midnight," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Oh, well, we won't sit up for him," suggested Frank. "I'm tired and -sleepy. I'm going to turn in soon. Maybe will stand guard for us, won't -you old fellow?"</p> - -<p>The dog barked his answer.</p> - -<p>A fire was kindled on the hearth, and the boys sat about this for a -while, talking over what had occurred since their arrival<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span> at Camp -Mystery. Then, as they were very sleepy, they locked up, leaving Maybe -stretched out before the glowing fire, and turned into the bunks.</p> - -<p>Contrary to their expectations, nothing happened all night. In fact they -did not wake up until morning, when the sun was streaming into the -cabin. Then Sammy jumped up, looked at the clock, and cried:</p> - -<p>"After eight; and Mr. Jessup isn't home yet!"</p> - -<p>"Maybe his sister is worse," suggested Frank. "Let's get breakfast, and -then we can decide on what to do."</p> - -<p>They made a good meal, and then, after talking matters over, they made -up their minds that the best thing to do would be to take a walk about -the island. If they saw no signs of Mr. Jessup by noon, they planned to -go over to the mainland, and perhaps give up their camp at Mystery, to -go home.</p> - -<p>"For, though we'd like to stay here alone, first rate," said Sammy, "our -folks might not like it, or think it safe. They let us come because they -thought Mr. Jessup was going to be with us, and if he isn't, we ought to -go home."</p> - -<p>"I s'pose so," sighed Bob, "but it's mighty jolly here."</p> - -<p>"Even with the old hermit, and the counterfeiters," spoke Frank.</p> - -<p>"Oh, the old hermit never will bother us," declared Sammy. "And maybe -the counterfeiters have been gone a long time."</p> - -<p>"And maybe Mr. Jessup will send someone to stay with us, if he can't -come back himself," went on Bob. "Then we could stay all right."</p> - -<p>"Say, that would be fine!" cried Frank. "It may happen, too. We'll wait -a bit about going back."</p> - -<p>They decided this would be a fair thing to do, and, after putting the -cabin to rights, after their morning meal, and planning what they would -have for dinner, they set out for a tramp about the island, Maybe the -dog going with them.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span></p><p>They went on for half a mile, when Bob, who was in the lead, suddenly -stopped, and called out:</p> - -<p>"There's somebody moving over there!"</p> - -<p>"Over where?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"There," answered Bob, pointing to a clump of trees, at the foot of -which was a bank of snow. "I just saw a man."</p> - -<p>"Maybe it's Mr. Jessup," spoke Frank.</p> - -<p>"I hope so," murmured Sammy. "I'd like to get after those men who live -in the secret room."</p> - -<p>And then, as the boys watched, the figure of an old man came out from a -clump of bushes. The man had a long white beard, and white hair, and as -he came into a little opening he looked in the direction of the boys.</p> - -<p>"The old hermit!" whispered Frank. "There he is!"</p> - -<p>And, as the boys looked, the aged man, about whom there seemed to be -such a mystery, shook his fist at them, and then disappeared behind a -clump of bushes.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XII</span> <span class="smaller">INTO THE DRIFT</span></h2> - -<p>"That sure was him!"</p> - -<p>"Yes, he's the old hermit!"</p> - -<p>"I wonder what he's up to now?"</p> - -<p>In turn Sammy, Bob and Frank spoke, as they looked toward the place -where the aged man had disappeared. They could still see the bushes -shaking as he forced his way through them.</p> - -<p>"I wish it had been Mr. Jessup," said Sammy, and he could not help -sighing a bit.</p> - -<p>"Yes, we need him," added Bob. "But we'll do the best we can. If he -doesn't come by night, I s'pose we'll have to go back home."</p> - -<p>"And I sure will hate to do that," put in Sammy Brown. "Maybe there'll -be a way out."</p> - -<p>For a moment the boys looked at one another, and then at the spot where -the hermit had vanished. Maybe barked once or twice, and then began -running about, as he had been doing ever since he came out with the -boys, hoping perhaps to scare up a rabbit.</p> - -<p>Sammy was doing some hard thinking. His eyes blinked fast, as they -always did when he had several ideas going through his mind at the same -time. Suddenly he exclaimed:</p> - -<p>"Fellows, are you with me?"</p> - -<p>"With you? In doing what?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"In following that old hermit? I want to see where he goes."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span></p><p>Neither Bob nor Frank answered for a moment.</p> - -<p>"Well, he's probably going to his cabin, or cave, or whatever he lives -in," Bob finally said: "We know about where it is, and I don't see any -good in following him. He might get mad at us."</p> - -<p>"He probably would," said Sammy. "But getting mad wouldn't hurt us. I'd -like to see where he goes."</p> - -<p>"Why?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"I have a certain reason," went on Sammy. "Do you know, fellows, the -hermit may be the—counterfeiter!"</p> - -<p>"What!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>"Do you mean that?" inquired Frank.</p> - -<p>"Well, I'm not sure, of course," went on Sammy. "But he might be, you -know."</p> - -<p>"Yes, of course," laughed Frank, "and the time we thought we had struck -a bear here, it might have been one, only—it wasn't!"</p> - -<p>"Oh, well, of course anyone can make a mistake," said Sammy. "And I'm -not saying I'm right. Only it's worth trying; isn't it?"</p> - -<p>"Well, maybe so," replied Frank, slowly.</p> - -<p>"All I want to do," went on Sammy, "is to follow the old hermit, and see -what he does. If he goes toward the place where we found the secret -room, and the queer things, we'll know he has something to do with -them."</p> - -<p>"Maybe," put in Frank, with a laugh. He did not always agree with Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Oh, of course, I'm not saying for sure," went on the other. "But will -you come?"</p> - -<p>"I don't mind," spoke Frank, after a few moments' thought. "But we'd -better not go too close."</p> - -<p>"That's what I say," added Bob. "He might try to harm us."</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span></p><p>"We've got Maybe with us," said Sammy, boldly. "I'm not afraid."</p> - -<p>And so the boys decided on Sammy's plan, little thinking what would come -of it.</p> - -<p>They could no longer see the hermit, but they thought they could trace -which way he went by following the tracks in the snow.</p> - -<p>"Besides, we have the dog with us," added Sammy, "and he can follow. He -can track the hermit just like he does a rabbit."</p> - -<p>The boys went on cautiously. They did not want to get too close to Mr. -Addison, who, though he was an old man, might be one who was very easily -made angry, and who might work some harm to them. In fact they already -knew that he lost his temper easily.</p> - -<p>For perhaps half a mile they followed the tracks of the aged man through -the snow. This was easy to do since he tramped over a place where the -white crust was unbroken by other footsteps. The dog, too, led them by -sniffing at the trail on the ground. But they had had no sight of Mr. -Addison since he had disappeared into the bushes after shaking his fist -at them.</p> - -<p>"He isn't going toward the old house," said Sammy, after a bit.</p> - -<p>"No, he's heading in the wrong direction for that," added Frank. "Maybe -he's going to his own cabin."</p> - -<p>"If he does," spoke Sammy, "we won't follow him there."</p> - -<p>The boys were now some distance away from Camp Mystery. They had -occasional glimpses of the frozen lake, but they had not seen any figure -bearing a likeness to Mr. Jessup, skating over it. The hunter was -probably still with his sick sister, they thought, and they did not -quite know what to do.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span></p><p>"Look out for yourselves here, fellows," said Sammy, as they came out -into an opening in the woods.</p> - -<p>"What's the matter—did you see the hermit?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p>"No, but there's a big cliff here, and we might slip over."</p> - -<p>"Let's have a look," suggested Bob, pressing forward with Frank to where -Sammy stood on the edge of a cliff which was about ten feet high, going -down steeply into a little valley.</p> - -<p>Suddenly, as the boys were looking over into a big drift of snow below -them, they heard a noise behind them. There was a rush of feet, and -Maybe, the dog, barked furiously. Then the harsh voice of the hermit -cried:</p> - -<p>"Follow me, will you? I'll teach you to do that! You'll be sorry you -ever tried to find out my secret!"</p> - -<p>Before the boys could defend themselves, or make a stand, the furious -old man rushed at them. With extended hands he pushed Bob over the cliff -into the deep bank of snow below.</p> - -<p>"Look out!" yelled Frank, as he saw his chum disappear.</p> - -<p>"Hey! What are you doing that for?" demanded Sammy.</p> - -<p>"I'll show you! I'll teach you to follow me!" snarled the old hermit. -"Down you go! All of you!"</p> - -<p>He pushed Frank over the cliff also, the boy struggling to keep his -balance. But over he went, head first.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i097.jpg" alt="He pushed Frank over the cliff also" /></div> - -<p class="bold">He pushed Frank over the cliff also.</p> - -<p>"Don't you dare touch me!" cried Sammy, getting ready to defend himself. -Yet he knew he could do nothing against the angry hermit.</p> - -<p>"I'll fix you!" cried the old man.</p> - -<p>"You let me alone!" pleaded Sammy. "Sic him, Maybe!" he cried, to the -dog.</p> - -<p>Indeed the hunter's dog needed no urging. At the first sign of the old -man Maybe had rushed at him. Now he was tugging at his coat-tails as -though to stop him from pushing the boys over the cliff. But the man was -strong, and paid no<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span> attention to the dog, dragging him along over the -slippery snow.</p> - -<p>"There you go!" cried Mr. Addison, and with that he shoved Sammy down -into the big snowdrift.</p> - -<p>"There!" muttered the hermit, with a hard smile on his wrinkled face. -"Now I guess them boys won't find out my secret!"</p> - -<p>And he walked away into the woods, the dog barking after him.</p> - -<p>As for the Fairview boys, they were more frightened than hurt. True, -they had been pushed down some distance, but they fell into a soft bank -of snow, and, except that it got down their necks, and up their sleeves, -as well as into their boots, they were in no danger. It was like falling -into a feather bed.</p> - -<p>"Whew! What happened?" gasped Bob, floundering about.</p> - -<p>"I guess we happened—or it happened to us!" said Frank. "Where's -Sammy?"</p> - -<p>"Here I am," cried that small hero. "He pushed me, too."</p> - -<p>"Say, he ought to be arrested!" exclaimed Bob, angrily, as he flopped -about in the snow. "What did he do it for?"</p> - -<p>"Said we were following him," answered Frank, as he wiped the snow out -of his face.</p> - -<p>"Well, I guess we were, all right," admitted Sammy. "But he had no right -to be so mean."</p> - -<p>"Where did he go?" Frank wanted to know.</p> - -<p>"I—I didn't stop to look," admitted Sammy. "It all happened too quick -for me."</p> - -<p>"Same here," laughed Bob. "Now I wonder if we can get out of here?"</p> - -<p>It was not as easy as it seemed at first, for the little valley into -which the boys had been pushed by the angry hermit was filled with snow, -and they sank in it above their waists.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span></p><p>But they floundered on, and were slowly making their way out. They were -getting quite tired, however, and might have sunk down in the snow, and -have taken severe colds, had their struggle lasted too long.</p> - -<p>Suddenly Bob cried out.</p> - -<p>"Hark!" he called.</p> - -<p>"It's a dog barking," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Yes, and it sounds like Maybe," added Frank.</p> - -<p>"See, there he is!" cried Sammy, "and he's got someone with him!"</p> - -<p>"It's Mr. Jessup! Hurray, now we're all right!" yelled Bob, with -delight. "Now we'll show that hermit what's what!"</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XIII</span> <span class="smaller">HELPING THE HERMIT</span></h2> - -<p>Mr. Jessup, with his dog floundering in the snow ahead of him, came -toward the boys, who were still stuck in the snowbank, though slowly -getting out of it.</p> - -<p>"What's the matter?" cried the hunter. "What happened to you? You ought -not to go in a place like that!"</p> - -<p>"We couldn't help it!" exclaimed Sammy, with a laugh. "We were pushed -in!"</p> - -<p>"Pushed in?" exclaimed Mr. Jessup. "What in the world do you mean, -Sammy?"</p> - -<p>"Help us out, and we'll tell you," suggested Frank. "We're tired out -trying to wade through the deep snow."</p> - -<p>"I guess that's right," admitted Mr. Jessup. "I had better be helping -you instead of talking. Come on, Maybe!"</p> - -<p>With big strides the hunter came on. To him the drift gave little -trouble, though for the small boys it was all they could do to wade -through. But now they had help.</p> - -<p>Mr. Jessup had a pair of snow-shoes strapped to his back, though the -crust was not thick enough to allow him to use them. They would come in -useful as snow shovels, though, and he at once took them for that -purpose.</p> - -<p>"Here you go!" he cried to Bob, who was nearest him. "Catch one of these -shoes and help dig a path. I'll dig one to meet with yours, and when you -get out here, where the snow isn't so deep, you'll be all right."</p> - -<p>"Hurray!" cried Sammy, glad that everything was more pleasant now.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span></p><p>"Is your sister better?" asked Frank, while Bob used the snow-shoe as a -shovel, the hunter doing the same with the one he had.</p> - -<p>"Yes, much better," was the answer. "I was sorry I had to stay away all -night, and I kept thinking, up to the last minute, that I could get off -and come back to you. That's why I didn't send anyone to keep you -company.</p> - -<p>"And finally, when my sister was well enough for me to leave her in the -care of some neighbors, it was too late to start for Pine Island. But I -made up my mind that you boys would be all right, and I didn't worry. -You were all right, weren't you, except for what happened to you just -now?"</p> - -<p>"Yes," said Sammy, eager to tell the story of the mysterious hidden -room, and the strange things in it, "yes, we're all right. Nothing -happened during the night, and we got along fine. Maybe was good -company."</p> - -<p>"I thought he'd be, and that's why I made him stay when I was called -away," said the hunter. "But he did want to come with me."</p> - -<p>While the boys and Mr. Jessup were talking he and Bob used the -snow-shoes as shovels, so that, in a few minutes, the boys were out of -the drift, and on level ground where the snow was only up to their -knees.</p> - -<p>"Now then," said Mr. Jessup, with a grin, as he looked at them, "I'm -ready to hear your story. How did it all happen, and who pushed you into -the drift?"</p> - -<p>"The hermit!" cried the three boys at once.</p> - -<p>"What! You don't mean Mr. Addison?" asked the hunter, in surprise.</p> - -<p>"That's who it was," said Frank.</p> - -<p>"Well, why did he do such a thing as that?" asked Mr. Jessup, in -surprise. "I've known him for sometime, and, except that he was a bit -odd now and then, he never acted that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span> way. I always thought him quite -gentle, except that he would order people away from his cabin. Did you -do anything to him?"</p> - -<p>For a moment the boys did not answer, and then Sammy, knowing that it -was best to tell everything, said:</p> - -<p>"Well, we followed him, that was all. We wanted to see if he was going -to the big house."</p> - -<p>"You followed him; that was all?"</p> - -<p>"Yes, sir."</p> - -<p>"And what did he do?"</p> - -<p>"Well, he got out of sight, and we were trailing him," explained Bob. -"Then we came to that cliff and we were looking over, down into the pile -of snow, when, all of a sudden——"</p> - -<p>"He rushed out on us from the bushes," continued Frank, "and he——"</p> - -<p>"Pushed us down, one after the other," said Sammy, taking up the story. -"And he said he'd teach us to follow him and try to find out his -secret."</p> - -<p>"Hum, he said that; did he?" mused Mr. Jessup. "Well, I'm afraid he must -be out of his mind. I've been thinking that for some time, and now I'm -sure of it. He must be crazy, or he wouldn't do such a thing as that. He -must have been quite angry at you, and it's lucky he did nothing worse -than shove you into a snowbank.</p> - -<p>"Now I advise you boys not to go near him again. If you see him as you -walk about the island, don't notice or speak to him. That will be the -safest way. So you followed him, and he thought you were after his -secret; eh? He hasn't any secret, as far as I know. Poor old man, he -certainly must be crazy. I'm sorry for him. But, boys, did you have any -special object in following him?"</p> - -<p>Again the three chums looked one at the other.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span></p><p>"You'd better tell, Sammy," said Frank, at last, "you made the find, -you know."</p> - -<p>"What's this?" asked Mr. Jessup, in some surprise. "Have you boys a -secret, too?" and he looked curiously at them, while Maybe frisked -about, barking and unable to understand why his master would not take -after a rabbit he had driven from its burrow.</p> - -<p>"Yes, we did find something strange in the old house," said Sammy. "We -discovered a secret room, and in it is an outfit of counterfeiters, Mr. -Jessup!"</p> - -<p>"And they shot at us!" cried Bob.</p> - -<p>"And you ought to have seen the smoke!" added Frank.</p> - -<p>The hunter looked from one to another of the boys, as if unable to -understand what they were saying. He might have thought they were -playing a joke on him, but their faces were too serious for that.</p> - -<p>"Secret room!" he murmured. "Counterfeiters! They shot at you!"</p> - -<p>"Yes, and we thought the hermit might be the counterfeiter, so we were -following him to see if he went to the old house," said Bob.</p> - -<p>"Whew! This is getting worse and worse!" exclaimed the hunter. "I guess -you'd better begin at the beginning, boys, and tell me all there is to -tell. Old Mr. Addison a counterfeiter! I can't believe it."</p> - -<p>"This is the way it was," began Sammy, and then he told of the -exploration of the old house, after the hunt of the day before, and how, -most unexpectedly, he had pressed on the spring that opened the panel or -door of the secret room.</p> - -<p>"And you should see the things in it!" put in Bob, as by turns the boys -described the queer instruments.</p> - -<p>"And then that flash and boom!" cried Frank. "It was terrible!"</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span></p><p>"It must have been," admitted the hunter. "But I own up that I am -puzzled. I never knew there was a secret room in the old house, and I -thought I'd been all over it. As for those things you tell about—well, -I guess I'll have to look at 'em myself."</p> - -<p>Mr. Jessup did not say so, but the truth of the matter was that the boys -had talked so fast and so excitedly, and had interrupted each other so -often, that they had not given a very clear account of the things they -had seen. Then, too, as is the case not only with boys, but with -grown-ups, no one ever sees the same thing the way another person would.</p> - -<p>The boys gave as good descriptions as they could of the queer objects in -the secret room, but each one put in something a little different, until -it was no wonder that Mr. Jessup was puzzled.</p> - -<p>"Now I'll tell you what," he said. "We'll go back to Camp Mystery and -figure this thing out. I guess I didn't name it out of the way when I -called it 'Mystery,' for it's more mysterious than ever now.</p> - -<p>"But we'll get to the bottom of it sooner or later. I'll have a look at -the things in that room. Maybe I can find out who has been taking my -grub. You weren't troubled while I was away last night! were you?"</p> - -<p>"No," answered Sammy, "nothing happened. We slept fine."</p> - -<p>"I thought you would be all right," went on the hunter. "I came skating -over to the island a little while ago, and went right to my cabin. You -weren't there, but pretty soon in came Maybe, and he acted so strange -that I was afraid something had happened to you. He pulled at my coat, -and would run on a little way, and then stop and bark, just as if he was -telling me to follow him, and he really was, as it happened."</p> - -<p>"He must have gone for help for us!" cried Frank.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span></p><p>"That's what he did," replied the hunter. "He led me right here, and I -can tell you I was a bit scared when I saw you floundering in the snow. -I'm glad you're all right."</p> - -<p>"Sure we're all right!" cried Sammy, "and I'd like to go to the old -house right away, and find out what all those things mean. If that is a -counterfeiting den we can have the men arrested; can't we?" he asked.</p> - -<p>Mr. Jessup laughed.</p> - -<p>"Well, Sammy," he said, "of course if there are counterfeiters here they -ought to be taken in, I s'pose. But I never heard of any, and there's -been no bad money circulating around Pine Island or Fairview, as far as -I know."</p> - -<p>"I told him they weren't counterfeiting things," said Frank.</p> - -<p>"You just wait!" exclaimed Sammy, mysteriously. He was sure his find was -going to turn out big this time.</p> - -<p>"Well, we'd better get back to the cabin and prepare to look into this -thing," suggested the hunter. "I want to think it over a bit. By the -way, was there any sign of anybody having been in that room lately?"</p> - -<p>"You couldn't tell—the bed looked as if it had been slept in," said -Bob. "But there must have been someone hiding there, or else how could -he have shot at us?"</p> - -<p>Mr. Jessup shook his head.</p> - -<p>"I'll admit it's a puzzle, so far," he said. "But after I see it I may -be able to explain it all. Come along."</p> - -<p>They headed back for the cabin, the boys talking on the way of the many -things that had happened since coming to Pine Island. Mr. Jessup said he -had heard no special news in Fairview. He had not sent any word to the -parents of the three chums, fearing they would worry about the boys -staying alone all night.</p> - -<p>"And it turned out better that I did not," he said.</p> - -<p>They were nearing the cabin of Camp Mystery, and Mr.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span> Jessup was -pointing out to the boys a trail that led from his place to the cabin of -the hermit.</p> - -<p>"But I wouldn't advise you to follow that trail after dark, unless you -know it pretty well," he said.</p> - -<p>"Why not?" asked Bob, always looking for reasons.</p> - -<p>"Because that bog, that I told you about, is on both sides of the trail -at certain places, and it's dangerous. I often wonder why old Mr. -Addison built his cabin so near the bog. It's true there are some good -springs of water near it, but I'd rather be on higher ground, and carry -my water a way. So don't travel that trail except in daylight, boys."</p> - -<p>They promised to be careful, and walked on, looking curiously back -toward the dangerous bog.</p> - -<p>Suddenly Frank, who was in the lead, raised a hand to order a halt and -silence.</p> - -<p>"What's up?" asked Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Listen!" said Frank.</p> - -<p>All heard a deep groan.</p> - -<p>"Someone's there!" exclaimed Bob, pointing to a clump of bushes just -ahead, and to one side of the trail.</p> - -<p>"Maybe it's a—bear!" faltered Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Nonsense!" exclaimed Mr. Jessup. "That's a human voice. Hello, there!" -he cried. "Who are you? What do you want? Has anything happened? -Answer!"</p> - -<p>"Maybe it's the counterfeiters," whispered Sammy.</p> - -<p>The dog was barking excitedly.</p> - -<p>"Come here!" commanded Mr. Jessup, and then, as the groan sounded again, -he went forward. Parting the bushes he looked ahead and cried out:</p> - -<p>"Boys, it's Mr. Addison—the hermit, and he seems to have fallen and -hurt himself! Come here and we'll help him!"</p> - -<p>The three rushed forward. There on the ground, under the bushes, where -there was no snow, lay the old man. He seemed<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span> to be unconscious and it -was his queer breathing that made the groaning sound.</p> - -<p>"Boys, see if you can't get him out of there, into a more comfortable -place," said Mr. Jessup. "I'll run to the cabin for a folding stretcher -I have, and I'll also get some medicine. See if you can get him out. -I'll be back in a few minutes."</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XIV</span> <span class="smaller">THE BOILING SPRING</span></h2> - -<p>Mr. Addison was a full-grown man, but he was quite old, and not very -heavy. In fact he was so light that the three sturdy boy chums easily -carried him out from under the bushes to a cleared place along the path. -The hermit only moaned as he was moved, and remained unconscious.</p> - -<p>"Let us take off our coats, fellows," suggested Sammy. "We'll spread -them out on the snow, and make a bed for him."</p> - -<p>The day was quite warm, so the boys would not be likely to take cold -from removing their coats, and soon they had made a more comfortable -place for the aged man than the bare ground on which he had fallen.</p> - -<p>"I wonder what could have happened to him?" said Bob.</p> - -<p>"He must have fallen, and hurt himself," spoke Frank. "But neither his -arms or legs are broken, as far as I can tell."</p> - -<p>"I guess it's his head," remarked Sammy. "Probably that's what makes him -senseless. I wish Mr. Jessup would hurry back."</p> - -<p>"And to think that a little while ago he pushed us into a snowbank!" -murmured Bob. "He couldn't do it now."</p> - -<p>"No," said Sammy, softly. "Poor old man! I guess he's had lots of -trouble."</p> - -<p>Indeed, as the aged hermit lay there on the boys' coats, which they had -partly folded over him, his face showed many wrinkles of care and -suffering, as well as of age. Truly,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span> he did not seem to have had a very -happy life, and in their hearts the boys easily forgave him for what he -had done to them.</p> - -<p>"Here I am!" exclaimed Mr. Jessup, as, followed by his dog, he came up -the path. Over his shoulder he carried a folding stretcher, consisting -of two poles with a broad canvass piece in between. On this the hermit -could be placed, and, by means of the handles, he could be easily -carried.</p> - -<p>"I'll give him a little spirits of ammonia first," said the hunter. -"That is good when a person has fainted. Then we can decide what next to -do. It may be that we'll need a doctor."</p> - -<p>He mixed some of the ammonia in a glass, with a little water, and -managed to get some between the lips of the old hermit. But it did -little good. The aged man only moaned feebly and did not open his eyes.</p> - -<p>"I guess we'd better carry him to his cabin," said Mr. Jessup, after a -few minutes. "It's farther than it is to Camp Mystery, but if he wakes -up, and sees himself in a strange place, it may have a bad effect on -him. We can easily carry him to his own cabin."</p> - -<p>This they did, the hunter taking one end of the stretcher, and two boys -taking turns at the other end. In this way they were soon at the place -where the hermit lived.</p> - -<p>The cabin was rough enough on the outside, but the interior was clean, -and nicely arranged. The poor old man lived very simply. He was placed -on his bunk, and then Mr. Jessup, who knew a little about medicine, -tried to bring him to his senses.</p> - -<p>It seemed to be of no use, however, and finally the hunter said:</p> - -<p>"Boys, I think I'd better skate over to the mainland, and bring back a -doctor. I wouldn't like poor Mr. Addison to die.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span> You're not afraid to -stay here with him; are you? I'll leave Maybe with you."</p> - -<p>"Afraid? Of course not!" cried Sammy. It was broad daylight. Why should -they be afraid?</p> - -<p>True, the mysterious old mansion was not far away, and the strange -things in the secret room had not been explained. But the boys made up -their minds they would not be alarmed.</p> - -<p>"I'll come back as soon as I can," said Mr. Jessup. "If he wakes up you -might give him a drink of water. Or you could make coffee. You know how, -and I see he has the things here. Yes, a good strong cup of coffee might -help him. Now don't worry. Maybe, you're to stay with the boys."</p> - -<p>The dog whined, and evidently wanted to go with his master, but he -obeyed well, and, with a bark of protest, he lay down on the cabin -floor.</p> - -<p>Mr. Jessup, who had his skates with him, started for the lake, intending -to skate to the mainland after a physician. He could come back with the -doctor in a cutter, for the ice was thick enough to bear the weight of a -horse.</p> - -<p>Left to themselves, the boys sat in the cabin with the old, unconscious -man. He breathed heavily but did not open his eyes. Once in a while he -groaned.</p> - -<p>"I wonder if we hadn't better make the coffee," suggested Bob, after a -bit. "If he could take some of that he might feel much better."</p> - -<p>"Good idea," said Sammy. "Let's start a fire. It's cold in here, -anyhow."</p> - -<p>There was a stove and an open fireplace, the latter in the other room of -the cabin. Some logs were set aglow on the hearth, and a roaring blaze -kindled in the stove. The kettle was put on, and soon a fragrant pot of -coffee was ready.</p> - -<div class="center"><img src="images/i111.jpg" alt="The kettle was put on" /></div> - -<p class="bold">The kettle was put on.</p> - -<p>The boys were talking over whether they had better not try to get some -of the hot beverage between the set lips of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span> aged man, when there -came a sudden knock on the cabin door.</p> - -<p>"Who's that?" whispered Frank, startled.</p> - -<p>"It can't be Mr. Jessup, back already," remarked Bob.</p> - -<p>"No, he'd walk right in," said Sammy.</p> - -<p>The knock was repeated.</p> - -<p>"See who it is," spoke Bob.</p> - -<p>"I'll go," said Sammy, and he went to the door.</p> - -<p>He saw a young man standing there—a young man he had never seen before, -as far as he knew. The stranger's face was a pleasant one, and he smiled -at the boy.</p> - -<p>"Well," said the visitor, "I don't know you, and it's rather odd to see -Mr. Addison having company. Is he in?"</p> - -<p>"Yes," said Sammy, "but he's hurt." He noticed that the caller had a -pair of skates in his hand, showing how he had reached the island.</p> - -<p>"Hurt!" exclaimed the young man. "And just when I come to bring him good -news! Let me see him, please."</p> - -<p>He quickly entered the cabin, and bent over the form of the hermit on -the bunk. The boys looked on in wonder. Who could this stranger be?</p> - -<p>The young man seemed to know something about the duties of a doctor, for -he rapidly felt about the aged man, for signs of broken bones, and then, -finding none, passed his hand over the sufferer's head.</p> - -<p>"Ah, there's the trouble," he said. "He's had a bad knock there, but it -doesn't seem to be serious. I think he'll soon come around. You have -coffee?" and he sniffed the air.</p> - -<p>"Good and hot!" answered Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Let me have some," suggested the young man, and some was given him in a -cup. Holding the aged man up in one arm, the young man managed to get -some of the hot coffee down his throat. It did good at once, for Mr. -Addison opened<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span> his eyes, looked strangely about him, gazed in seeming -wonder at the boys, and then looked at the young man who was supporting -him.</p> - -<p>"It's all right, Uncle Frank," said the stranger. "You're all right. You -had a little fall, and these boys must have brought you here. But you're -not hurt to speak of, and I bring you good news."</p> - -<p>"Good—good news," faltered the old man. "You bring me good news, Ed?"</p> - -<p>"Yes, the very best. The land is now yours. I have here all the papers. -You don't need to live here any longer to claim it. You can come home -with me. I have the deeds to the land."</p> - -<p>"And the spring—the boiling spring—is the medical spring mine?" gasped -Mr. Addison. He seemed to be getting better very quickly.</p> - -<p>"The boiling spring is yours," the young man assured him. "Now take it -easy—everything is all right."</p> - -<p>"Oh, I am so glad—so glad!" murmured the old man, sinking back on the -bunk. "Now I won't have to worry about anyone taking my secret away from -me. Oh, everything is all right now," and he sighed in contentment.</p> - -<p>"Take a little more coffee," urged the young man whom the hermit had -called Ed. "It will do you good."</p> - -<p>It really seemed to, for soon the aged man was able to sit up again.</p> - -<p>He looked at the boys strangely, and they did not know what to do or -say. They wondered if the hermit would try to drive them away.</p> - -<p>"Are—are you the boys I pushed over the cliff?" he asked.</p> - -<p>"Yes," replied Sammy, and he wondered how the old man could explain his -queer action.</p> - -<p>"Well, I—I'm sorry I did it," went on the hermit. "You<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span> see I was a bit -excited. I thought you were following me, trying to steal my secret. But -you can't get it now. I own the land. You have the papers—the deed, -Ed?" he asked eagerly.</p> - -<p>"Yes, Uncle Frank, here they are," and the stranger gave a bundle of -documents to the old man, who eagerly looked them over.</p> - -<p>"Yes—yes," he said. "It's all right. I have a clear title to the -boiling spring. And now I'll explain. But in the first place, how did I -get here? I seem to remember falling down——"</p> - -<p>He paused for an answer.</p> - -<p>"You did fall," said Sammy. "Mr. Jessup and we boys found you under the -bushes, and we carried you here. He has gone for the doctor."</p> - -<p>"Hum, yes. That's very good of him—and you, especially after the way I -treated you. But I hardly knew what I was doing. But I don't believe I -need a doctor. I'm all right."</p> - -<p>He really seemed so, and was able now to walk slowly about the cabin.</p> - -<p>"I remember what happened," he went on. "I was going down to the shore -to see if you were coming, Ed, for you had promised to be here to-day, -when I slipped and fell. I must have struck my head on a stone, for it -all got dark, and I didn't remember anything else until I saw you giving -me coffee. All the rest is a blank."</p> - -<p>"Well, you're all right now, Uncle Frank," was the answer. "I suppose -I'd better tell you who I am," the newcomer went on to the boys. "My -name is Edward Houghton, and Mr. Addison is my uncle. I have been doing -some legal business for him for some time, and now it is all finished."</p> - -<p>"And the medical boiling spring is my property!" cried the hermit.</p> - -<p>"Yes, it is your property," said his nephew.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span></p><p>"And you and I will get rich!" the old man cried, enthusiastically.</p> - -<p>"I hope so," spoke Mr. Houghton. "You certainly have suffered very much -to get your rights. But it is all over now."</p> - -<p>The boys were quite puzzled by this talk, but it was soon to be -explained. There was the jingle of sleigh bells from the direction of -the lake, and soon was heard the approach of footsteps.</p> - -<p>"It's Mr. Jessup!" cried Sammy. And so it proved. He had brought the -doctor back with him in a cutter.</p> - -<p>"I'm much obliged to you, Mr. Jessup," said the old hermit, "but I don't -believe I need the doctor's services."</p> - -<p>"However, as long as he's here, better let him look you over," suggested -Mr. Houghton.</p> - -<p>The medical man said, beyond a hard blow on the head, which had made him -unconscious for a time, Mr. Addison was not hurt.</p> - -<p>"I'd stand another blow on the head for the sake of my fine spring," -said the hermit, and he laughed.</p> - -<p>He really seemed quite a different man now. His face was kinder, and the -boys were no longer afraid of him.</p> - -<p>"I guess you'll have to explain," suggested Mr. Jessup. "What is it all -about, and what do you mean by your boiling spring, Mr. Addison?"</p> - -<p>"Come with me, and I'll show you," said the hermit.</p> - -<p>With slow steps he led the way to a little glade, not far from his -cabin. There the boys saw a strange sight. In spite of the fact that it -was Winter, and that snow was on the ground, there was a spot of green -grass and ferns to be seen, surrounding a boiling and bubbling spring of -clear water. And from the water a little cloud of steam arose.</p> - -<p>"There she is!" cried Mr. Addison. "There's my boiling spring, and the -waters of it are the best thing in the world for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> rheumatism. I know, -for I've cured myself, and cured others. I discovered the spring by -accident, and I worked hard to get title to the land it's on. Now I have -it, and I'm going to bottle those waters and sell 'em. I'm going to be -rich! I'm not going to be a hermit any longer," and he seemed ten years younger.</p> - -<hr /> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span></p> - -<h2><span>CHAPTER XV</span> <span class="smaller">THE END OF CAMP MYSTERY</span></h2> - -<p>"Well," said Mr. Jessup slowly, "this may be all clear to you and your -nephew, Mr. Addison, but it's like Greek to me. If you wouldn't mind -explaining——"</p> - -<p>"Of course I'll explain," said Mr. Addison eagerly. Sammy hoped -something would be said to clear up the mystery of the strange room in -the old mansion.</p> - -<p>"First of all," said the hermit, "I want to tell you boys how sorry I am -that I pushed you into the snow. I was all excited when I saw you -following me, and I really didn't know what I was doing. You see I had -been expecting my nephew for some time, and when he didn't come I was -afraid something had happened so that I couldn't get the spring I had -tried so hard for. So first I want to beg your pardon."</p> - -<p>"Oh, that's all right," said Sammy, easily. "It was as much our fault as -it was yours. We had no right to follow you, and really we weren't hurt -a bit."</p> - -<p>"I'm glad of it," said the old man. "Well, to begin at the beginning. -Some months ago, when I was walking over this island, I found this -boiling spring. It was in a place few people would visit, and I guess -that's why it was never talked of before. For a good many years I have -had the rheumatism, and I've tried all sorts of cures. Just by accident -I thought of trying this spring water, as I could easily tell that it -had some sort of medicine in it.</p> - -<p>"I took some home, and in a few days after taking it I felt<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span> better. -Then I made more tests, and I was sure I had found a cure for some of -the worst kinds of rheumatism. Then I decided to try to get possession -of the land on which the spring was.</p> - -<p>"This was not easy, as the title was in dispute. But I got my nephew to -help me. In order that no one else would claim the spring, I decided to -put up a cabin near it, and live on the land until I could buy it. This -I did, and I became a sort of hermit. I was so afraid someone would -discover the secret of the spring that I drove away anyone who came -near. In that way I suppose folks began to think I was crazy, and a sort -of crank.</p> - -<p>"But I did not care. I wanted to get title to that spring, for I knew I -could sell the waters and get rich. And now I can. My nephew has brought -me the final papers, and the spring is mine. I am going to form a -company, and bottle the boiling water. Of course it won't stay hot, but -it will be just as good, for it can be heated before being swallowed.</p> - -<p>"So I'm no longer the hermit of Pine Island. I'm going back where I -belong, and I'll let others do the work. And I'll say this, Mr. Jessup, -if ever you get the rheumatism you can have free all the water from my -mineral spring that you want."</p> - -<p>"Thank you!" said Mr. Jessup, with a laugh, "but I hope I'll never have -the rheumatism. But if I do I'll use your spring water."</p> - -<p>"I had a hard time getting the final papers," said Mr. Houghton, "and -that's what took me so long. But now, Uncle, the boiling spring is -yours, and you needn't worry any more."</p> - -<p>"How can it be hot water in the Winter time?" asked Bob.</p> - -<p>"Well, that's one of the mysteries of Nature," said the former hermit. -"I suppose the waters must come from deep<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span> down in the earth, and the -wise men tell us that inside the earth are raging fires. I don't know -about that, but I do know my medical spring will cure rheumatism. And I -guess now, everything is explained."</p> - -<p>"No, not everything," said Sammy quickly.</p> - -<p>"Eh?" asked the old man.</p> - -<p>"We found a secret room in the old mansion," went on Sammy, "and it's a -counterfeiters' den, I'm sure. We thought you were going there, Mr. -Addison, that's why we followed you.</p> - -<p>"And while we were in there," Sammy went on, "there was an explosion. We -thought someone was shooting at us, and we ran out. That has to be -explained yet."</p> - -<p>"That's so!" exclaimed Mr. Jessup. "I've got to look into that."</p> - -<p>Mr. Houghton laughed.</p> - -<p>"It won't take much of an explanation to do away with that mystery," he -said. "If you'll come with me I'll show you all about it. I fancy you -stumbled across one of my fads. Will you come, Uncle Frank?"</p> - -<p>"No, I'll go back to my cabin," was the hermit's answer. "I'm going to -pack up and go back to the mainland to live, now that my medical spring -is safe."</p> - -<p>"Then the rest of us will go," suggested the young man.</p> - -<p>They left the little glade where the hot spring made grass grow in the -middle of Winter, and soon reached the hermit's cabin again. He went in -there, while Sammy and his chums, with Mr. Jessup and Mr. Houghton, kept -on to the deserted mansion, telling the hermit they would soon be back -to look after him. The doctor, whom Mr. Jessup had brought, had gone -back to the mainland in his cutter.</p> - -<p>"Shall we go right in?" asked Sammy, when Mr. <span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span>Houghton and the others -reached the old house, and prepared to enter.</p> - -<p>"Of course—why not?" inquired the young man, with a smile.</p> - -<p>"Well, I was thinking that the counterfeiters——"</p> - -<p>Mr. Houghton laughed.</p> - -<p>"I'll explain all that," he said.</p> - -<p>The place of the secret room was soon reached. It was just as when Sammy -and his chums had rushed away from it after the explosion that had so -frightened them. The sliding door was still wedged back with the piece -of shutter.</p> - -<p>Mr. Houghton went over to the table on which was piled the strange -apparatus. He moved some of the wires and springs.</p> - -<p>"Look out!" cried Sammy. "You may get shot!"</p> - -<p>"No danger!" laughed the young man. "I fancy you boys set off the -flashlight, and there isn't another."</p> - -<p>"Flashlight!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Yes, that was what made the smoke and explosion," said Mr. Houghton. -"You touched the spring that worked the electric battery, and the -current set off some flashlight powder in a box. It did make quite an -explosion, I fancy."</p> - -<p>"But what was flashlight powder doing up here?" asked Mr. Jessup.</p> - -<p>"I was trying to get some night photographs of bats," explained Mr. -Houghton. "You see all this apparatus is just some photographic cameras, -set to work automatically. I fancy I have the pictures of you boys on -the plate, instead of the bats," and he smiled at the three chums.</p> - -<p>"Photographs!" cried Sammy.</p> - -<p>"Cameras!" exclaimed Bob.</p> - -<p>"Aren't these things telescopes?" asked Frank.</p> - -<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span></p><p>"And isn't there any counterfeiting plant?" Sammy wanted to know.</p> - -<p>"Nothing half as sensational as that," answered Mr. Houghton, with a -hearty laugh. "This is only my new apparatus for having animals take -their own pictures."</p> - -<p>For a moment there was silence, and then Sammy, in a queer sort of -voice, murmured:</p> - -<p>"Stung again!"</p> - -<p>All his mystery had vanished into thin air.</p> - -<p>"Make animals take their own photographs; eh?" said Mr. Jessup. "That's -rather odd."</p> - -<p>"Oh, it is often done," said Mr. Houghton. "All you have to do is to set -your camera in the woods after dark, near where you have noticed marks -of a raccoon, muskrat or other wild animal. You put a string across the -path the animal usually takes, and in the dark it runs into the string -and breaks it. This sets off a flashlight which makes the place as light -as day. The breaking of the string also opens and closes the shutters of -the camera, and so the animal takes its own picture. I've been doing it -for some time, and had good results. I left my cameras, flashlights, -batteries and so on here, in the hope of getting pictures of bats, but I -guess I'll have to try again."</p> - -<p>"So that's what it was that exploded," said Sammy—"flashlight powder?"</p> - -<p>"That was it," said Mr. Houghton. "You see I happened to discover this -secret room by accident. I was going through the old mansion one day, -thinking it would be a good place to get bat pictures, and I found the -secret chamber. So I fitted it up as a room where I could sleep when I -had to. Often I would take my cameras out in the woods and leave them -there until nearly morning. Then I would get up and go bring them in. I -did not want to disturb my uncle so I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span> stayed here. I fancy the secret -room must have been built by the man who put up the old mansion, for his -own use."</p> - -<p>"I think so," agreed Mr. Jessup. "He was a queer character anyhow. And -to think I've been in and out of the old place so much, and never found -the secret room!"</p> - -<p>"It was pretty well hidden," said Mr. Houghton. "Well, I don't imagine -I'll use it any more. I'll try for bat pictures somewhere else. Besides, -if my uncle's mineral spring turns out as well as he thinks it will, -this place may become a Summer resort, and the old mansion could be made -into a hotel for people who want to take the rheumatism cure."</p> - -<p>"But there's one thing I don't understand," said Mr. Jessup, "and that -is who took my grub."</p> - -<p>"I think I can explain that, too," spoke Mr. Houghton. "I had hired a -young man to assist me, in my photographic work, but when I found out he -was not honest I discharged him. I saw him come along one day with a -strip of bacon, and a long pole with a hook on the end. He said he had -hooked the bacon."</p> - -<p>"And so he had!" cried Mr. Jessup. "That was one of the pieces I -missed."</p> - -<p>"The fellow must have stood some distance away from your cabin, and -caught the string of the bacon in the hook on the pole," said the -photographer. "That's why you never saw any footmarks."</p> - -<p>"Then this is the end of Camp Mystery," said Sammy, faintly.</p> - -<p>"That's right!" cried Frank. "I told you there weren't any -counterfeiters."</p> - -<p>"Well, there might have been," returned Sammy.</p> - -<p>And he wondered why the others laughed.</p> - -<p>But it was really the end of Camp Mystery. The hermit's secret had been -the warm, medical spring, and now that he<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span> had full title to it he need -not worry any more, nor drive away those whom he thought might try to -cheat him out of the property.</p> - -<p>Mr. Houghton had explained the queer machines in the secret room, and -had told how he used to photograph wild animals at night. A few days -afterward he showed the boys how he set the cameras in the wood, with a -string which the animals themselves would break, thus setting off the -flashlight and taking their own picture.</p> - -<p>Mr. Jessup made some inquiries, and found out that the secret room in -the old mansion had been built by the former owner of it. He had no -particular use for it, but it was just a notion on his part to have it -made. Mr. Houghton had accidentally discovered it, just as Sammy had -done.</p> - -<p>As for the young man who had taken things from Mr. Jessup's camp, he was -not heard of again. After all, he had not taken a great deal, and his -plan of using a long pole with a hook on it explained why he had never -left any marks. He could reach in the window or door of the cabin when -Mr. Jessup was away, and get what he wanted. He had been in the habit of -staying in the secret room when Mr. Houghton did not sleep there.</p> - -<p>"Well, as long as everything is explained, we may as well go back to -camp," said Sammy, when they left the old mansion.</p> - -<p>"Yes, I guess so," agreed Mr. Jessup. "You boys are entitled to some fun -after your hard work."</p> - -<p>"Yes, and they're entitled to more than that," said Mr. Addison, a -little later. "I owe them something for helping take care of me," and -some time afterward, when the Mineral Spring Company was formed, he sent -each of the boys a nice present.</p> - -<p>"Well, now we'll take it easy," suggested Sammy, when<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> they got back to -the hunter's cabin, late that afternoon. "We'll go skating and coasting, -and——"</p> - -<p>"Fishing through the ice," added Mr. Jessup. "I've had that in mind for -you for some time."</p> - -<p>"Say, this trip to Camp Mystery is all right!" cried Frank, with a -laugh. "I wonder if we'll have as much fun as this next Winter?"</p> - -<p>"More I hope," said Sammy. "But Summer will come before Winter."</p> - -<p>And what the chums did the following Summer may be learned by reading -the next volume of this series, to be called "Fairview Boys at -Lighthouse Cove; Or, Carried Out to Sea." In that we will meet all our -young friends again.</p> - -<p>In the days that followed Sammy and his chums had many good times. They -roved about the island with Mr. Jessup and watched him at his hunting. -They had many good meals, too. Mr. Addison left Pine Island, now that he -had possession of the spring, and one of the members of the company he -had formed took up a residence in the cabin. But there was no further -trouble. The mystery had been solved.</p> - -<p>"Come on for a skate!" cried Bob, one afternoon. "We only have a few -more days here."</p> - -<p>"That's right—and then school once more!" exclaimed Sammy.</p> - -<p>And as the Fairview Boys are starting off on the glittering ice, we will -take leave of them.</p> - -<p> </p> -<p> </p> -<hr class="full" /> -<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP MYSTERY***</p> -<p>******* This file should be named 52130-h.htm or 52130-h.zip *******</p> -<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br /> -<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/5/2/1/3/52130">http://www.gutenberg.org/5/2/1/3/52130</a></p> -<p> -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed.</p> - -<p>Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. -</p> - -<h2>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> -<br /> -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</h2> - -<p>To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license.</p> - -<h3>Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works</h3> - -<p>1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8.</p> - -<p>1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.</p> - -<p>1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others.</p> - -<p>1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States.</p> - -<p>1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:</p> - -<p>1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed:</p> - -<blockquote><p>This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United - States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost - no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use - it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with - this eBook or online - at <a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you'll have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this - ebook.</p></blockquote> - -<p>1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.</p> - -<p>1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work.</p> - -<p>1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.</p> - -<p>1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License.</p> - -<p>1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.</p> - -<p>1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.</p> - -<p>1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that</p> - -<ul> -<li>You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation."</li> - -<li>You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works.</li> - -<li>You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work.</li> - -<li>You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.</li> -</ul> - -<p>1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.</p> - -<p>1.F.</p> - -<p>1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment.</p> - -<p>1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE.</p> - -<p>1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem.</p> - -<p>1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.</p> - -<p>1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions.</p> - -<p>1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. </p> - -<h3>Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm</h3> - -<p>Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life.</p> - -<p>Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org.</p> - -<h3>Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation</h3> - -<p>The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.</p> - -<p>The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact</p> - -<p>For additional contact information:</p> - -<p> Dr. Gregory B. Newby<br /> - Chief Executive and Director<br /> - gbnewby@pglaf.org</p> - -<h3>Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation</h3> - -<p>Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS.</p> - -<p>The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit <a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/donate">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>.</p> - -<p>While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate.</p> - -<p>International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.</p> - -<p>Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate</p> - -<h3>Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works.</h3> - -<p>Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support.</p> - -<p>Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition.</p> - -<p>Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org</p> - -<p>This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.</p> - -</body> -</html> - diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8e8b4b5..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/i002.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/i002.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a0966e8..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/i002.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/i023.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/i023.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 66f8f60..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/i023.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/i035.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/i035.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dfbfce5..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/i035.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/i051.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/i051.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8c3c05e..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/i051.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/i067.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/i067.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 536df1a..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/i067.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/i085.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/i085.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 83314c4..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/i085.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/i097.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/i097.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 99f939f..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/i097.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/i111.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/i111.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 56ea37e..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/i111.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130-h/images/logo.jpg b/old/52130-h/images/logo.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5306601..0000000 --- a/old/52130-h/images/logo.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/52130.txt b/old/52130.txt deleted file mode 100644 index a62856d..0000000 --- a/old/52130.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4464 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook, Fairview Boys at Camp Mystery, by Frederick -Gordon, Illustrated by R. Menel - - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - - - - -Title: Fairview Boys at Camp Mystery - or, the Old Hermit and His Secret - - -Author: Frederick Gordon - - - -Release Date: May 22, 2016 [eBook #52130] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII) - - -***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP MYSTERY*** - - -E-text prepared by Martin Pettit and the Online Distributed Proofreading -Team (http://www.pgdp.net) from page images generously made available by -Internet Archive (https://archive.org) - - - -Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this - file which includes the original illustrations. - See 52130-h.htm or 52130-h.zip: - (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/52130/52130-h/52130-h.htm) - or - (http://www.gutenberg.org/files/52130/52130-h.zip) - - - Images of the original pages are available through - Internet Archive. See - https://archive.org/details/fairviewboysatca00gord - - - - - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP MYSTERY - -Or - -The Old Hermit and His Secret - -by - -FREDERICK GORDON - -Author of "Fairview Boys Afloat and Ashore," "Fairview Boys on -Eagle Mountain," "Fairview Boys and Their Rivals," etc. - -Illustrated - - - - - - - -Charles E. Graham & Co. -Newark, N. J. New York - - - -[Illustration: "What's the matter?" cried the hunter.] - - - * * * * * * - -BOOKS FOR BOYS - -BY FREDERICK GORDON - -FAIRVIEW BOYS SERIES - -Illustrated. Price, per volume, 75 cents, postpaid. - - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AFLOAT AND ASHORE - Or, The Young Crusoes of Pine Island - -FAIRVIEW BOYS ON EAGLE MOUNTAIN - Or, Sammy Brown's Treasure Hunt - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AND THEIR RIVALS - Or, Bob Bouncer's Schooldays - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP MYSTERY - Or, The Old Hermit and His Secret - -FAIRVIEW BOYS AT LIGHTHOUSE COVE - Or, Carried Out to Sea - - * * * * * * - - -Copyright, 1914, by -Graham & Matlack - - - - -_Fairview Boys At Camp Mystery_ - - - - -CONTENTS - - -CHAPTER PAGE - I. THE EARTHQUAKE 7 - - II. THE FIRST SNOW 14 - - III. SAMMY HAS AN IDEA 22 - - IV. A QUEER SIGHT 31 - - V. WINTER FUN 40 - - VI. A FINE CHANCE 48 - - VII. AT CAMP MYSTERY 56 - -VIII. THE OLD MANSION 62 - - IX. SAMMY'S QUEER FIND 70 - - X. THE MYSTERIOUS ROOM 77 - - XI. THE STRANGE HERMIT 84 - - XII. INTO THE DRIFT 93 - -XIII. HELPING THE HERMIT 101 - - XIV. THE BOILING SPRING 109 - - XV. END OF CAMP MYSTERY 119 - - -[Illustration: Logo] - - - - -Fairview Boys at Camp Mystery - - - - -CHAPTER I - -THE EARTHQUAKE - - -"There's Jed Burr!" - -"Coming back to school; eh? Then he can't be suspended any more." - -"No, he isn't. But I wish he was. There's sure to be a lot of trouble -now, and I was thinking how much more fun we could have with him away." - -Three boys stood talking together in the school yard, where many -children were waiting for the final bell to ring to call them to their -studies. The three boys were looking at a larger lad, who was walking -slowly along the gravel path. - -"He looks to be the same bully as ever," said Bob Bouncer, one of the -three boys. - -"I guess he is, too," added Frank Haven. "Being suspended can't have -changed him much." - -"Well, if he tries any of his mean tricks on me," spoke Sammy Brown, "I -know what I'll do!" - -"What?" asked Frank, as he turned about to face the larger lad, so as to -be ready, in case of any sudden attack, of the kind for which Jed Burr -had a reputation. "What'll you do, Sammy?" - -"I'll have him arrested! I'm not going to stand for any more of his -games!" - -"I'm with you!" agreed Bob. "But maybe we could play a trick on him -first. He's played so many mean ones on us." - -"Now don't start anything," advised Frank, who was more quiet than -either of his two chums. "If we begin, the blame will be on us. We'll -let Jed alone if he lets us." - -"He doesn't seem to be going to do anything," added Sammy. "Maybe he's -going to behave better this term." - -"I hope so," returned Frank. "Well, let's go in. Doesn't our room look -dandy, since they fixed it up after the fire?" - -"I should say so!" cried Sammy. "And Miss Williams brought a fine lot of -pictures for the walls. It's more like the parlor at home than a -classroom." - -"Yes, and Miss Williams isn't like some teachers, either," went on -Frank. "She's as kind as can be." - -The three boys strolled toward the schoolhouse, which had opened for the -Fall term after some delay, caused by a fire. Now the building, in some -parts, was altogether new, and all the rooms had been redecorated and -painted. The structure had also been made larger. - -"Well, I'm glad, in some ways, that school's begun again," said Sammy. -"Though vacation was lots of fun." - -"Yes, we can have some good times in school," agreed Frank. - -"And there's that clubroom your father fixed up in the barn for us," put -in Sammy. "That sure was good of him, Frank. We can have fun there, if -we can't at school. And I'm going to do a lot of training in our club -gymnasium, too, this winter." - -"Huh! You train!" laughed Frank. "First we know you'll be off to the -mountains, looking for more buried treasure." - -"Aw, you're always casting that up!" grumbled Sammy. "Still, you must -give Bob credit for finding your father's jewelry that the tramp hid -down in the schoolhouse well." - -"That's right," agreed Frank. "And you found miser Dolby's pocketbook. -Oh, say, look! There goes Jed into the principal's office! I guess -something must be going to happen." - -"I know all about it!" exclaimed a voice back of the three boys. They -turned quickly, to see Nellie Somers. - -"Tell us about it!" begged Sammy. He and his chums so much wanted to -know the story of the suspended boy coming back, that they did not mind -asking a girl about it. - -"Jed has promised to be a better boy," said Nellie, glad that she had a -chance to give some information. "The school board considered his case, -after he took the spelling list out of Miss Williams' desk, and said he -couldn't come back until he promised to be good. At first Jed wouldn't, -but he finally did, and he has to apologize to the whole school this -morning. Then he can be in his class again." - -"Oh ho!" cried Sammy. "So that's what makes Jed so quiet!" - -"No wonder he didn't try any tricks," added Frank. - -"He sure will feel mean to have to get up before the whole school," -added Bob Bouncer. "Come on in. It's almost time for the last bell." - -"Good-bye!" cried Nellie, as she ran on to join her girl friends. - -It was the first day of the new term, and there was more or less -confusion. And since it was the first day, no one wanted to be late. -Also the talk of Jed's apology had spread, and everyone wanted to see -what would happen. - -Into the school trooped the boys and girls, laughing and talking. Many -looked about to see the changes made since the fire. As Sammy, Frank and -Bob started up a short flight of steps to their room, they were -startled to hear a banging noise above them. They looked up, and saw -Johnnie Jones, one of the fattest little chaps in the school, start to -roll down. He had stumbled at the top step, and had fallen head over -heels. - -"Look out!" cried Bob. - -"Hold fast!" advised Sammy. - -"Catch him!" called Frank, and this was the best advice of all. "Get -together," went on Frank to his chums, "and we'll hold him when he gets -here." - -They were now about half-way up the flight of steps, and, forming -themselves into a solid body, as though about to stop a rush in a -football game, they braced themselves to catch fat Johnnie. - -With a bump and a bounce he landed against them, and in another moment -Frank had set the little fellow on his feet again. - -"There you are, Johnnie!" said Frank, while Sammy and Bob brushed the -dust from his clothes. "You aren't hurt; are you?" - -Johnnie gasped once or twice, opened his mouth as though to howl, and -then, thinking better of it, closed his lips again. - -"No, I'm not hurt!" he said bravely. - -"He's too fat to get hurt!" laughed Bob. "You're like a rubber ball; -aren't you, Johnnie?" - -"I--I guess so," answered the little fellow, "but I don't want to bounce -down stairs again!" - -The three chums laughed at him as he started up the stairs once more, -and they kept close behind him, but he did not fall again. - -Into their classroom went Bob, Sammy and Frank. Other boys and girls -were already there, and more came in. Miss Williams was there to meet -them with a smile. She was a very pretty school-teacher, and her pupils -loved her. - -Soon the final bell rang, and then the children from the different rooms -marched into the one, big main hall, or auditorium, where the morning -exercises were held. There were many new pupils present this first day -of the term. - -There was singing, the reading of the Bible, and prayers, and then Mr. -Tetlow, the principal of the school, greeted those present. He spoke of -the fire, and what had happened at it, and mentioned the delay in -opening the school. He welcomed all who had now come, and said he hoped -they would all study hard to make up for lost time. - -"And now," went on the principal, "I have something not so pleasant to -say. But it has to be done, and it may be for the good of all of us. One -of our pupils was suspended last term for doing something wrong. We all -do wrong sometimes, but if we are sorry for it, and try not to do it -again, we should be forgiven. - -"And so I hope when you hear Jed Burr say that he is sorry, you will all -forgive him, and be friends with him again. Now Jed, let's get it over -with," and he smiled at the former bully, who sat in a front seat. The -principal wanted to make it as easy as he could for the lad. - -Jed was very red in the face as he shuffled up to the platform. He hung -down his head, and no one could doubt but that his punishment was hard. -He stood for a moment before all the school, getting very red in the -face. - -"Well," said Mr. Tetlow, kindly, "go on, Jed. Just a few words, to tell -us you are sorry." - -"I--I--er--I done wrong," stammered poor Jed, "and I'm sorry for it!" - -The principal stepped up beside him. - -"That is enough," he said. "You did very well, Jed. Now we will let -bygones be bygones. You may all go to your classes." - -Sammy, Bob and Frank, with the others, marched out. The little scene in -which Jed, their former enemy, had taken part, had made them do some -hard thinking. They were glad they had not been called on to stand up -and apologize to the whole school. - -Soon lessons were under way once more. Miss Williams gave a little talk -to the pupils in her room, explaining the new work that was to be taken -up that Fall and Winter. - -"It will be harder than that which you had before the fire," she said, -"but you know we have to go ahead in this world. It will not do to stand -still. I will help you all I can. - -"You will notice that I have hung some pictures on the walls. They are -to help you in your lessons, for it is sometimes easy to understand a -thing when we see a picture of it. I have other pictures to bring when -we need them." - -Sammy Brown suddenly thought of something. He raised his hand to show -that he wished to speak. - -"What is it?" asked Miss Williams. - -"We've got some pictures in our clubroom," said Sammy. "I could bring -them. There's a football game picture, and a lot of baseball players, -and a man hunting, and----" - -Sammy saw a smile on Miss Williams' face, and paused. - -"That's very nice of you, Sammy," she said, kindly, "and if we need that -sort of pictures you may bring them. But I'm afraid our lessons won't be -about baseball or football. You'll get enough of those games out of -school. - -"Now we will begin on the geography lesson. I want you to look at this -picture over here. It shows----" - -But Miss Williams did not say what the picture showed, for at that -moment there was a low, deep rumbling that seemed to go all through the -school. The building shook and trembled. Then the rumble grew to a -roaring sound, and the building vibrated still more. The windows rattled -as if the glass would break. - -Several girls screamed. The boys leaped from their desks. - -"It's another fire!" yelled Sammy. - -"It's an explosion!" shouted Bob. - -"No! It's an earthquake!" exclaimed Frank. "Come on, everybody! Get out -before the school falls on us!" and he made a rush for the door. - -"Stop!" commanded Miss Williams sharply. "Boys, you are forgetting -yourselves. Let the girls go first!" - -And, while the rumbling continued, and the building still shook, the -boys held back, while the girls rushed from the room. - - - - -CHAPTER II - -THE FIRST SNOW - - -The whole school was in excitement. From all the rooms the boys and -girls were rushing out, not stopping for their hats or coats. Frightened -teachers, and the excited principal, were trying to quiet them. For -everyone felt sure the school building was going to fall, and all wanted -to get out as quickly as possible. - -"Now, boys, you may go!" said Miss Williams, when the girls were out of -her room. - -Some of the boys started, but Frank Haven, taking his place at the door, -cried: - -"No, Miss Williams, you go first!" - -She gave him a glance that showed how much she appreciated his -thoughtfulness for her, but she said quietly, though her lips trembled: - -"No, Frank. I am like the captain of a ship. I will stay until the last. -But, oh, do hurry out!" - -Hearing this two other boys made a rush. - -"That won't do!" cried Bob sharply. "You'll all get in a jam on the -stairs." - -"That's right!" exclaimed Sammy. "Form in line, as we always do at fire -drill!" - -"Good!" cried Miss Williams. "Ready! In line! March!" - -Her sharp command had a good effect, and the boys marched out in order. -Sammy and his two chums came last, and Miss Williams followed them. The -rumbling and shaking of the building still continued, and now dense -white clouds could be seen coming from the basement. - -"She's on fire again!" cried Sammy, as he and his chums reached the yard -safely. - -"And she'll burn up!" added Bob. - -The school yard was filled with excited children, the teachers urging -them to get as far away from the building as they could. - -"Is everyone out?" asked the principal. "Teachers, look at your -different classes and see!" - -This was done quickly. - -"Oh dear!" exclaimed Miss Watson, teacher of the kindergarten. "Oh -dear!" - -"What is it?" someone asked. - -"Johnnie Jones--he isn't here!" - -At that instant, through a cloud of smoke in front of the window of the -kindergarten room a face could be seen. It was that of Johnnie Jones. - -"He's in there!" gasped his teacher. - -"I'll get him!" shouted the principal. "Get the children farther off!" - -"Now, let me get him--please?" cried another voice, and Jed Burr, the -bully, who had apologized that morning, sprang forward and went back -again into the building which it was feared would fall at any moment. - -"I can't let him do that!" murmured the principal. "I must go after both -of them." - -But before he could do this Jed came out again, carrying fat little -Johnnie Jones in his arms. - -"I got him all right!" shouted the former bully. - -"You're a brave boy!" cried Mr. Tetlow. - -Just then the janitor of the school came up out of the basement. - -"It's all right!" he cried, through a white cloud of steam. "I have -fixed it! I'll tell you all how it happened." - -"Is the earthquake over?" asked Sammy. - -"It wasn't an earthquake," said Mr. Hobb, the janitor. "Come here, and -I'll tell you about it." - -And while the frightened teachers and pupils are gathering back in their -rooms, the danger being over, I will take a few moments to tell my new -readers something about the boys and others who are to have parts in -this story, and also something about the previous books in this series. - -To begin with, I think you already know my three heroes--Sammy Brown, -Bob Bouncer and Frank Haven. Though I have named him last in this case, -Frank was generally the leader in anything he and his two chums did. Bob -and Sammy thought there was no one in the world like Frank. - -Sammy was rather more quiet, and his mother said more thoughtful, but if -this was so, it was only because Sammy was always thinking up something -to do. He was quite a reader, and liked stories of mystery, and buried -treasure. He was always sure that some day he would find a hidden store -of gold, or make some big discovery. - -Bob Bouncer was a different sort of lad. He was full of fun, not to say -mischief, and when he was around one had better look out that he did not -find a funny note pinned to his coat-tail or else watch out that he did -not discover a stone dropped into his pocket. But, though Bob played -many jokes, they were not mean or cruel ones. - -The three boys lived in the town of Fairview, on the shore of Rainbow -Lake, a large body of water, in the centre of which was an extensive -island. - -The first book of this series was called "The Fairview Boys Afloat and -Ashore; Or, The Young Crusoes of Pine Island." In that I had the -pleasure of telling how the three chums went out on the lake in the -_Puff_, a sailboat owned by George Haven, Frank's brother. They did not -know much about boats, and the result was that the _Puff_ was wrecked -near Pine Island. The boys managed to get on this body of land, and -there they lived, until rescued, in real Robinson Crusoe style. - -In the second book, called "The Fairview Boys on Eagle Mountain; Or, -Sammy Brown's Treasure Hunt," I related how the lads set off on a tour -of discovery. Sammy Brown had come across some curious papers in his -home attic, and was sure they told of hidden treasure. So the party set -off for Eagle Mountain, and what they did there, and how the treasure -hunt ended, you may read of in the book. - -"The Fairview Boys and Their Rivals; Or, Bob Bouncer's Schooldays," is -the name of the third volume. In that you can find out all about the -many things Bob and his chums did; how they got the better of a mad -bull, how they had fun in the woods, and how it was that Jed Burr came -to be expelled. Then came the robbery of Mr. Haven's jewelry store, the -fire in the school, and the finding of the jewelry down in the well, -where the thief had thrown it. - -And the fire, as I have related, was the cause of the school not being -opened on the regular day in the term. Which brings us down to the -present time. - -"Was there a fire?" asked Mr. Tetlow, the principal. - -"No, not exactly a fire," answered the janitor, "though the trouble was -caused by a fire." - -"And there wasn't any earthquake?" asked Sammy. He was rather -disappointed, to tell the truth, that there had been nothing as big and -sensational as an earthquake. - -"Nary an earthquake," went on Mr. Hobb, who was rather pale. "Indeed -everyone had been greatly alarmed." - -"But the building shook!" declared Nellie Somers. - -"It certainly did," agreed Miss Williams. "I thought surely it was going -to fall down." - -"And I thought Jed was going to fall down with me," spoke up Johnnie -Jones. "He shook me up and down." - -"I couldn't help it," said Jed, with blushing face. "You're so--so fat." - -"I guess I am," sighed little Johnnie. - -"Well, Jed, it was one of the bravest acts I have ever seen," declared -the principal, and Jed blushed with pleasure. It seemed that he wanted -to make up for his mean tricks in the past by showing that he could be a -hero when he desired. - -"Now I'll tell you how it was," went on the janitor. - -"Yes, do," urged Mr. Tetlow. "We don't want it to happen again." - -By this time the excitement had quieted down. There was no more smoke, -and there was no smell of fire. - -"I had started up the new heating boiler to try it," explained the -janitor. "We didn't exactly need steam on to-day, though it is a bit -cold, and it looks like snow. But I thought I'd try the new steam plant, -so I built a fire in the boiler. - -"I left it going and went off to do some work in another part of the -school, and I guess I forgot about the steam. Anyhow, all at once I -heard the roar and the rumble, and I felt the building shake. I knew -right away what had happened, and I ran down cellar. I didn't even stop -to explain to anyone." - -"Well, what did happen?" asked the principal. - -"Why, the safety valve got stuck, and when the pressure got too heavy it -wouldn't let the steam escape. So the pipes, all through the school, -were filled and the pressure was so strong that they commenced to shake -and tremble. That made the building vibrate, and the boiler began to -rumble and roar, too. - -"I was afraid it might blow up, so down I rushed and opened the safety -valve that was stuck shut. That let out the steam, and the pressure in -the pipes went down. And that's all." - -"It was enough," said Miss Williams. "So that white cloud was steam, and -not smoke from a fire?" - -"Yes, ma'am," answered the janitor, "it was only steam." - -"Is the safety valve all right now?" asked Mr. Tetlow. - -"Oh, yes, indeed!" exclaimed the janitor. "I fixed it. I should have -looked at it first, but it slipped my mind. I'm sorry." - -"Well, it's all right, as long as no one is hurt," said the principal. -"And now, as we have had so much excitement, I hardly believe that you -children could do well with your lessons this morning. It is eleven -o'clock now, so I will dismiss you all until this afternoon. Come back -when you have had your dinners." - -There were cries of delight at this, and the boys and girls hurried back -into their classrooms, after their hats and coats, for the weather -seemed to be getting colder. - -Sammy and his two chums passed close to Jed Burr as they went in. Then -Sammy did a kind act. - -"Will you shake hands, Jed?" he asked of the former bully. "That was a -fine thing you did." - -Jed blushed. - -"Aw, that was nothin'," he said. "There wasn't any danger." - -"But you didn't know that," returned Frank. "I'd like to shake hands -with you, too." - -"So would I," added Bob Bouncer. "I guess we'll all be friends now, -after this." - -"I've turned over a new leaf," said Jed, when they had shaken hands with -him. "I'm not going to bother you fellows any more." - -"That's good," spoke Sammy, for Jed had been a sore trial to them, and -to many other small lads of Fairview. - -"And we'd be glad to have you around to our clubhouse whenever you want -to come," added Frank, kindly. - -"Thanks," said Jed, gratefully. - -After Bob Bouncer had discovered Mr. Haven's jewelry hidden in the well, -following the schoolhouse fire, the merchant had offered Bob a reward of -a hundred dollars. But Bob's father would not let him take it, so Mr. -Haven used the money in fitting up, in his barn, a fine clubroom and -gymnasium for Bob and his chums. - -Talking over the accident to the steam boiler, and making merry that -they had had such a short morning session, the boys and girls hurried -along on their way home. Sammy and his chums walked together, and, every -now and then, Sammy would look up at the sky. - -"What are you planning now?" asked Bob, giving Sammy a sly punch in the -ribs. "Studying how to make an airship?" and he winked at Frank. - -"Aw, let me alone," begged Sammy. "Can't I look at the weather if I want -to?" - -"Sure," agreed Bob. "But what makes you so serious about it?" - -"I'm thinking it's going to snow," answered Sammy, "and I'm going to get -out my sled, when I go home, to be ready for it. I've got to get the -rust off the runners." - -"Snow!" cried Frank. "It won't snow to-day." - -But it did. Before school was out that afternoon the white flakes began -coming lazily down, and the children, looking from the windows, felt -merry at the prospect of a storm. Snow is so different from rain. Almost -everyone is happy and jolly when it snows, but miserable when it rains. - -"Say, it's going to be a good storm all right!" cried Sammy, as he and -his chums came out of school when lessons were over for the day. "It's -three inches deep now, and falling fast." - -"Yes, we'll have to get out our snow-shoes if it keeps on," laughed Bob, -as he slyly dropped some snow down Frank's neck. - -"Ouch!" cried Frank, squirming about as he felt the coldness down his -spine. "I'll wash your face for that, Bob Bouncer!" - -He raced down the street after his fun-loving chum, but before he -reached him he saw something that made him stop. This was the sight of -an elderly lady walking carefully along, just ahead of him, through the -snow. As Frank came up behind her he saw her fall heavily, and lay quite -still in a heap on the sidewalk. - -"Here you go, fellows!" cried Frank, to Bob and Sammy. "We've got to -help her--come here!" - - - - -CHAPTER III - -SAMMY HAS AN IDEA - - -"Maybe she's dead!" gasped Sammy Brown, as he reached the side of Frank, -and looked down on the motionless old lady. - -"There you go!" cried Frank, half angrily, "always thinking something -like that. Why should she be dead?" - -"She fell heavily enough," said Bob. "The snow's awful slippery. Maybe -her leg's broken." - -"That's more like it," said Frank. "Now we've got to take her into one -of these houses. Can we carry her?" - -"I guess we'll have to," said Bob. "There doesn't seem to be anyone else -around just now. Can we lift her?" - -At that moment the elderly lady who had fallen tried to get up. Her -eyes, that had been closed, were opened, and she looked very pale. - -"Are you hurt?" asked Frank, anxiously. "We'll help you get up, and -carry you into one of these houses." - -[Illustration: "Are you hurt?" asked Frank.] - -He gazed up and down the street as he spoke. There were no other persons -in sight, and the accident had happened at a place where there were only -a few houses. Had there been stores nearby someone might have come out -at once to help the old lady. - -"I don't believe I am badly hurt," she said, with a smile. "I thought at -first my leg was broken, but I'm sure, now, it is not, though it may be -sprained. I slipped and struck my head when I went down. I must have -been unconscious for a few seconds." - -"You were," said Bob, who had once seen his mother faint. "Now, if -you'll let us, we can carry you to the nearest house, and get a doctor." - -"I'm sure I'm very much obliged to you nice boys," spoke the elderly -lady, "but I do not believe you can carry me. I am pretty heavy." - -"We're strong," declared Sammy. "We play football!" he added, proudly. - -"Well, I think I can walk," the lady went on, "though I may have to lean -on your shoulders. I should not have come out without my rubbers to-day, -but I did not think it was going to snow. I guess Winter has set in now, -and I rather dread it." - -The boys thought this strange. To them Winter was one of their jolly -seasons, when they had much fun. They did not stop to think that the -poor and the old do not like the hard cold of Winter. - -"If you will let me take hold of your hands," went on the elderly lady, -"I think I can get to my feet. Then you may be able to help me to one of -those houses." - -She held up her hands as she spoke. Sammy took one and Frank the other, -while Bob lifted her at the shoulders. - -"Now!" she exclaimed, in a stronger voice than she had used before, "all -together, and I'll be up!" - -The boys pulled and pushed, and slowly the old lady was gotten to her -feet. She swayed unsteadily for a moment, and leaned heavily on Frank. - -Just then, a window in the nearest house was opened, and a woman, -leaning out, called: - -"Bring her right over here, boys. I'll look after her. I'll come and -help you. Are you much hurt, Mrs. Blake? I just happened to see you." - -"No, thank you, I'm not much hurt. I think I'm all right, except -perhaps for a strain, or some bruises," was the answer. "I have good -helpers, you see. Don't come out in the storm. They can get me to your -house." - -"Are you Mrs. Blake?" asked Sammy, quickly. - -"That is my name," was her answer, with a smile. - -"I guess my mother knows you," went on Sammy. "Her name is Brown." - -"Oh, are you Mrs. Brown's boy?" exclaimed Mrs. Blake. "I thought I knew -your face. Well, I'm real glad to see you. And are these your brothers?" - -"No'm, they're my chums," answered Sammy. "Do you feel all right now?" - -"Yes, only a trifle dizzy. I'll be better when I rest a bit in Mrs. -Handee's house. Now let me see if I can walk." - -She found that she could, by going slowly. The shock of her fall was -passing off, and by leaning on the shoulders of Bob and Frank, while -Sammy carried her bag and umbrella for her, she made her way to the -house where the woman waited with the door open. Mrs. Handee came down -the front steps to help Mrs. Blake up, and soon the elderly lady was -sitting comfortably in an easy chair before the fire. - -"My!" exclaimed Mrs. Blake, leaning back comfortably. "This has been -quite an experience for me," and she looked at the three boys, who did -not know exactly what to do, now that they had come in. "I never fell -before--not since I was a girl, and I guess I've forgotten how to do -it." - -"You were lucky not to have broken some bones," spoke Mrs. Handee. "Are -you sure you don't want the doctor?" - -"We'll go for one!" offered Sammy, eagerly. - -"Oh, no, indeed, I don't want one," declared Mrs. Blake, with a laugh. -"I'll be all right soon, and able to go home. My daughter will be -worried about me. My, how it snows!" and she looked out of the window -where could be seen a perfect cloud of white flakes coming down. - -"Yes, I think we're going have a regular old-fashioned Winter," said -Mrs. Handee. "I dread it, too. Now I'm going to make you a nice hot cup -of tea. Will you boys have something to eat?" she asked. - -Sammy and his chums looked at one another and their faces got rather -red. - -"If--if you please," said Sammy, "I'm not allowed to have strong tea." - -"Me either!" added Frank and Bob. - -"Bless your hearts! I didn't mean tea!" laughed Mrs. Handee. "It is not -good for growing boys, unless it's very, very weak, and then it isn't -tea. I meant to give you some bread and jam. Do you think you could eat -it?" - -"Could we?" murmured Sammy. - -"Just try us, Mrs. Handee!" exclaimed Frank, and, with another laugh, -the lady of the house went out to the kitchen. - -"Well, I'm sure I can't thank you boys enough for what you did for me," -said Mrs. Blake, after a pause. - -"It wasn't anything," replied Bob. - -"Oh, yes, it was, too!" she insisted. "I thank you very much, and I want -to tell your mothers what nice boys you are. Lots of young folks -now-a-days don't think, or care, anything about the old folks. Seems to -me, now, that I've often seen you three boys around Fairview together; -haven't I?" and she looked at them closely. - -"Yes'm, we're generally together," replied Sammy. - -"Do you go camping together?" asked Mrs. Blake. - -"Oh, yes, often," spoke Frank. - -"And once we were all wrecked together on Pine Island," added Bob. - -"You don't tell me!" exclaimed Mrs. Blake. "On Pine Island? Why I have -a brother there. Peter Jessup is his name. He's quite a hunter, too. He -lives at the far end, near Woodport. Have you ever been there?" - -"No, we were down at the other end," said Frank. - -"Then perhaps you did not meet my brother?" - -"No, not that we know of," answered Sammy. - -"I'm sure he'd be glad to see you," proceeded Mrs. Blake. "He is fond of -boys. When he was young he was just like you, always going off on -hunting or fishing trips. If ever you go to Pine Island again I wish -you'd call on him. I'll write him a letter, explaining how kind you have -been to me, and I'm sure he'd be glad to see you at his hunting cabin." - -"Has he a hunting cabin?" asked Bob, his eyes shining in delight. - -"Indeed he has, with lots of skins, and deer horns and the like of that -in it," said Mrs. Blake. "Of course he did not get them all around here, -for game is rather scarce. But he lives the life of a hunter still, -sleeps in a 'bunk' as he calls it, and all that. He even cooks over a -campfire in the summer." - -"Oh, I wish we could go there!" sighed Bob. - -"I'm sure you'll be welcome," spoke Mrs. Blake. And then Mrs. Handee -came in with the tea for her elderly guest, and the bread and jam for -the boys, and that they enjoyed it I am sure I need not say. - -"Well, I think I will be able to go along now," said Mrs. Blake, after a -pause. "That tea made me feel much better." - -"Are you sure you can go?" asked Mrs. Handee. "It's quite a step to your -daughter's house." - -"Oh, I can do it," was the answer. "My leg is much better, and I only -have a slight headache. I thank you very much. As for you boys, don't -forget to come and see me, and I'll tell you more about my brother -Peter. I'll be sure to write to him and tell him you're going to visit -him." - -"We'll go if we can," said Frank. - -Sammy Brown seemed to be thinking deeply on some subject. - -The boys said good-bye and went out into the storm. The snow was still -coming down, and they wanted to play in it--to make balls to toss at one -another, to roll in it, to jump over and into the drifts, to roll big -balls as the foundation for a snow house. - -There was nothing more they could do for Mrs. Blake, she said, and she -would soon start for home herself. So Sammy, Bob and Frank hurried away, -promising to call on the lady to whose aid they had come. - -"Are you really going?" asked Frank of his chums, as they walked on -through the snow. "I mean to her house?" - -"Of course we are!" cried Sammy. "I want to meet her brother the hunter; -don't you?" - -"I guess it would be nice," agreed Frank. - -"Nice!" cried Sammy. "Say, I guess you don't know what might happen if -we went to see him; do you?" - -"You mean we might shoot a bear or a deer?" laughed Frank. - -"No, I don't mean anything like that, for now there aren't any such -things on Pine Island. But you know we never have been up at the far end -of the island, and we might find----" - -"Oh, I know what he's going to say!" cried Frank, as he threw a snowball -at a boy going down the street. "You're thinking we can find some -treasure there; eh, Sammy?" - -"Well, we might!" insisted Sammy, not minding the laughs of his chums. -"That part of the island is lonely enough for treasure. But I had -another idea." - -"Say, you're full of 'em to-day!" remarked Bob. - -"Let's hear it," suggested Frank. - -"Well, you know there's supposed to be a queer old hermit up at the far -end of the island," went on Sammy. - -"A hermit?" cried Frank. - -"Yes, a strange old hermit, with a long white beard, and I've heard it -said that he has some secret he's trying to hide. If we go there we -might find out the secret. Now what do you think of that for an idea?" -demanded Sammy, eagerly. - - - - -CHAPTER IV - -A QUEER SIGHT - - -Sammy's two chums looked strangely at him. He returned their gaze -steadily. - -"Well," he said, defiantly, "it's true! What makes you look at me that -way?" - -"Ha! Ha!" laughed Frank. "He's the same old Sammy, isn't he, Bob?" - -"That's what he is! Always thinking he's going to find a treasure, and -if he can't do that he trots out an old hermit. Go on, Sammy, can't you -scare up a ghost while you're at it? The ghost of Pine Island! Go ahead, -make up something about that." - -Sammy Brown turned squarely about, and walked away from his chums -without saying a word. - -For a moment Frank and Bob looked after him, and then they looked at one -another. - -"There he goes," exclaimed Frank. - -"And I guess he's mad, too," added Bob. - -"But I didn't mean anything." - -"Neither did I!" - -"Let's call him back." - -"Let's go after him!" - -Thus Bob and Frank spoke, one after the other. Then Bob cried: - -"I say, Sammy! Come on back! Wait a minute. We didn't mean anything." - -But Sammy kept on his way, never turning his head to look back. On he -plodded through the snow that was still falling. - -"He's real mad this time," said Bob. - -"Yes, I guess we'll have to apologize, same as Jed Burr did," agreed -Frank. "Come on!" - -Together they raced after Sammy, and, catching up to him, they grasped -him by either arm. They spoke quickly and eagerly by turns. - -"We didn't mean anything." - -"We were only fooling." - -"Maybe there is a hermit on Pine Island after all." - -"We--we apologize!" burst out Frank. - -He said it in such a comical manner that Sammy, hurt as his feelings had -been, could not stand out against his chums any longer. A smile came -over his face, and then Bob and Frank laughed too. - -"All right, Sammy," declared Frank. "We believe you. Tell us about the -hermit. Maybe we can go up there and see him." - -"And about the ghost, too," added Bob. - -"There isn't any ghost that I know of," cried Sammy, quickly, "and I -didn't mention any." - -"Bob means the hermit," said Frank quickly, winking at his chum to show -that he must not speak of that subject again. "Tell us about the hermit, -Sammy." - -"Well, I'll tell you all I heard," went on the lad who so loved to dig -after mysteries. "It was Benny Lane, the cripple boy, who told me. I was -walking along with him one day, about a week ago, and we saw old Silas -Dolby, the miser, just ahead of us. I just happened to say that Mr. -Dolby lived like a hermit, and Benny said that it was so, for his uncle -had once seen a hermit." - -"And of course that set you going right off," spoke Bob. - -"Yes, it did," answered Sammy. "I asked Benny where his uncle had seen -the hermit, and Ben said it was on Pine Island. That was the first I -ever heard of one of those men being there, so I asked all I could about -it. - -"Benny didn't know much, but he said his uncle had been out fishing one -day, and stopped off at Pine Island to eat his lunch. He was almost -through, when an old man, all stooped over, and with a long white beard, -came out of the bushes, shook a stick at Benny's uncle and told him to -get off that part of the island, as he owned it." - -"Did he go?" asked Frank. - -"Yes," went on Sammy, "for the hermit acted dangerous. Ben's uncle -thought maybe he might be an escaped lunatic. So he got into his boat, -the hermit watching him all the while, and rowed away." - -"And what became of the hermit?" asked Frank, always eager for details. - -"He disappeared into the bushes again," said Sammy. "I didn't tell you -fellows anything about this, for I knew you'd laugh. Then, when Mrs. -Blake just now told us about her brother living on Pine Island, and when -she said we might go to see him, I thought I'd tell you about the -hermit. But you didn't believe me." - -"Oh, but we do now!" said Frank, quickly. - -"And is he hunting after a buried treasure?" asked Bob. He began to -think there might be more, after all, to Sammy's story than he had at -first thought. - -"I don't know, for sure, anything about a treasure there," said Sammy, -remembering how he had once started on a treasure hunt, which had ended -in the finding of only a pocketbook with memorandum papers in it. And -this belonged to Miser Dolby. But there was something else of value in -the wallet, so, after all, Sammy's hunt amounted to something. - -"Well, we might go up to the island, and see the wild hermit, anyhow," -suggested Frank. "That would give us something to do when we get a day -or so of vacation." - -"The only trouble is that the lake will soon be frozen over," put in -Bob. - -"We could skate over," suggested Sammy. - -"That's right, we could!" cried Frank. "We'll do it!" - -"What do you s'pose the hermit lives on the island for?" asked Bob. "And -why didn't we see him when we were wrecked there?" - -"I don't know," replied Sammy. "Maybe he likes to be lonesome, or else -maybe no one wants him to live near them. He may be sort of wild." - -"I should think he was, if he drove Benny's uncle away," came from -Frank. "We'll have to be careful if we meet him." - -"That's right," agreed Sammy Brown. - -The boys kept on toward their homes, meeting with many of their friends -on the way. There were several snowballs thrown, all in good fun, and -some of the boys proposed to make a snow fort, and have a regular -snowball fight. - -The next day, after school, the fort was built in a vacant lot. Then the -boys divided into sides, one party getting inside the fort, and the -other, outside, trying to capture it. - -The three chums decided it would be more fun to storm the fort, so they -joined the outside forces. The battle lasted for some time, and many -snowballs were thrown back and forth. - -[Illustration: The battle lasted for some time.] - -"Come on, now! Charge on the enemy!" cried Frank, when he thought he saw -a good chance to take the fort. - -He led the charge, and with such good effect that the fort was captured, -and he and his chums left in possession. Then the battle turned about, -and the snowball fight began all over again. - -Several days of winter fun passed. The boys and girls went coasting -before and after school, made snow-men and rolled large snowballs. The -weather was pleasant, and just warm enough so that the snow would pack -well. - -One day Mrs. Blake called on Mrs. Brown, to thank her for the way in -which Sammy and his chums had helped her. - -"Your son and his chums are very bright and good boys," said Mrs. Blake, -who had gotten over her fall in the snow. "I have written to my brother, -Peter Jessup, about them, and he says anytime they want to visit his end -of Pine Island he'll be glad to look after them." - -"That is very kind of him," said Mrs. Brown, "but Sammy and his two -friends go off now on more strange trips than I think is good for them." - -"Oh, pshaw!" exclaimed Mrs. Blake. "Boys will be boys! Let 'em roam, I -say, as long as you know where they are, and that they are safe." - -"Well, I guess if they get the chance they'll go," laughed Mrs. Brown. -"They generally get what they're after. I'll tell them of your -kindness." - -When Sammy and his chums heard of what Mrs. Blake had said, and of the -invitation of Mr. Jessup, the hunter, they grew excited at once, and -wanted to start for Pine Island the next day. - -But there was school to be thought of, and they, as well as the other -pupils, had missed considerable on account of the delay caused by the -fire. - -"Besides, it's Winter now--not Summer," said Mrs. Brown. "It would not -do to go to the island in Winter." - -"Oh, yes, it would," cried Sammy. "We could dress warm." - -"Besides," said Frank, "Mr. Jessup had a warm cabin." - -"Well, you'd better wait," suggested Sammy's mother, and they had to do -so. - -But, about a week after this, there came a cold spell of weather and the -lake was frozen over. When Frank awoke one morning he looked out of his -window, and saw a sheet of ice on Rainbow. - -"Oh, fine!" he cried. "Now for some skating!" - -He took his skates to school with him that morning, as did Sammy and -Bob, and during the noon recess the chums, and several of their friends, -tried the ice. It was smooth, and thick enough to be safe. - -"Let's skate over to Pine Island after school is out!" proposed Sammy. - -"I'm with you!" cried Bob. - -"And I'll go too," added Frank. "Maybe we'll see the hermit." - -They said nothing to their companions about their plans, but when school -was dismissed that afternoon they put on their skates and started across -the frozen lake. They felt sure they could reach the island and get back -home before dark, and each had received permission to go skating after -school, though the island was not mentioned. - -It was glorious fun on the ice. For some time the three chums found -themselves in the midst of their skating companions, but they soon left -them behind, and, a little later, were nearing Pine Island. - -"Make for the upper end," advised Sammy. "That's where the hermit will -be, if he's anywhere." - -But though they had had good luck up to this time, bad luck now set in. -First the skate of one of the boys would become loose, and he would have -to stop and tighten it. Then the same thing would happen to another. So -they were delayed, and it was almost dusk when they came opposite the -far end of the island. This was a place they had seldom, if ever, -visited. - -"Well, here we are at last," said Sammy. "I'm going to take off my -skates and go ashore a while. My feet ache." - -"We really ought to go back," said Frank, slowly. "It's getting dark, -and if we're as long going home as we were coming it will be after six -when we get in. The folks will worry." - -"Oh, well, we won't stay but a minute--just to rest," said Bob. "I'm all -out of wind." - -"Well, all right," agreed Frank. - -So they took off their skates and walked on the island. It was covered -with snow, and curiously still and silent. - -"I wonder where Mr. Jessup has his cabin?" spoke Sammy. - -"Probably well inland," said Frank. - -"Hark!" cautioned Bob. - -There sounded a rustling in the bushes just ahead of the boys, near a -clump of trees. Something moved. - -"Maybe it's a bear!" exclaimed Sammy. - -"Huh! Like the one you thought you saw before, only it was a dog!" -laughed Bob. - -"Forget it!" grunted Sammy. He did not like to be reminded of that. - -"Look!" suddenly exclaimed Frank. With trembling finger he pointed -straight ahead. It seemed as if a snowbank was moving. And then the boys -saw a queer sight. - -A shaggy head of white hair, and a long white beard rose up almost in -front of them. The hair and beard framed a scowling face, that glared -directly at the three boys. - -"Quick! Run!" cried Sammy. "It's the wild hermit of Pine Island!" - - - - -CHAPTER V - -WINTER FUN - - -For a moment, in spite of Sammy's warning, neither of his chums was able -to move. Nor, for that matter, was Sammy either. As snakes are said to -charm birds by looking at them steadily, so the sight of the old hermit, -if such he was, seemed to charm the three boys into standing still there -in the snow on the shore of Pine Island. - -It was rather a scary scene, with dusk falling, amid a silence that was -more startling than noise would have been. The old man rose up from the -snow-covered bushes, seeming to tower more than six feet in height. He -looked steadily at the boys. - -Then Sammy found his voice again, and yelled: - -"Come on, fellows, run!" - -"That's right! I'm with you!" added Frank. - -And by this time Bob Bouncer had gotten over his first fright, so he, -too, added his voice to those of his chums. - -"Hit him!" he cried. "Throw a snowball at him!" - -"Don't you dare do it!" came from Sammy. "That'll make him awful mad! -Run for all you're worth!" - -This seemed the best advice, for really the old man, in spite of his -long white hair and beard, that made him look something like the -pictures of Santa Claus, had not a kindly-appearing face. He scowled, as -though very angry at the boys. - -As yet he had not said a word, only, as he rose to his full height, he -made a move as if to come from behind the bushes, back of which he -seemed to have been hiding. - -"Here he comes!" yelled Sammy. "Come on, fellows!" - -They needed no other warning. The three boys took to their heels, and -crashed over the snow and bramble-covered ground to the edge of the -frozen lake. - -"You'd better get away from here!" yelled the strange old man after -them. "If I catch you around here again, I'll----" - -But the boys did not stop to hear what he would do to them. They did not -even stop to fasten on their skates, but ran over the ice, slipping and -sliding. - -"Is--is he coming?" gasped Bob. - -"I don't know. Look back and see for yourself," said Sammy. - -Bob did so, but as one cannot very well run over slippery ice and look -backward at the same time, what happened to Bob can be easily imagined. - -Down he went in a heap, rolling over and over, and sliding along as -well. - -"Hey, fellows!" he cried. "Don't leave me. Help! He'll get me sure! Stay -with me!" - -His appeal touched the hearts of his chums. - -"We can't leave him like that!" said Frank. - -"No," panted Sammy. "We'll have to stay with him." - -They slid along, unable at first to stop on the slippery ice, and then -they slowly came to a halt. Turning, they went back to pick up Bob, but -he had already scrambled to his feet, and was running after them. - -"He isn't coming," said Frank, catching sight of the strange man, -standing on the shore of the island, near where the boys had landed. "I -guess he isn't going to chase us." - -"It's a good thing, too," panted Bob. - -"Why?" asked Frank, with a smile. - -"Because if he'd come after me I'd have hit him with my skates; that's -what I would!" boasted Bob. - -"What did you run for then?" asked Sammy. - -"'Cause you fellows did. Think I was going to stay there all alone and -tackle him? I was not! So he isn't coming after us; eh?" - -"No, there he stands," answered Sammy, peering through the darkness. -They could just make out the old hermit, and as they looked they saw him -shake his fist at them. Then he disappeared behind a tree. - -"Well, come on, let's get on our skates and make for home," proposed -Frank. "It's getting late, and the folks will be worried." - -"That's right," agreed Sammy. "But I guess, after this, you fellows will -believe what I tell you about hermits and--and things; won't you?" - -"Well, you were right about the hermit," admitted Frank. "He sure is -there. But that doesn't say there's treasure on the island." - -"Treasure! Of course there is!" insisted Sammy. "Did you ever know of a -hermit where there wasn't treasure? That's what hermits are for--to -guard a treasure." - -"Well, maybe," said Bob, slowly. "Anyhow if there _was_ treasure on the -island, I wouldn't want to hunt for it if that terrible old man was -guarding it." - -"I would," spoke Sammy, bravely. "Maybe he doesn't look so scary by -daytime. I'm coming up again." - -"I'm not!" exclaimed Bob. But none of the boys knew how soon they would -again visit Pine Island, nor what strange adventures they would have -there. - -They soon had their skates on, and struck off across the frozen lake -toward Fairview and their homes. It grew darker and darker, but -presently the stars came out, and as the ice was glaring white they did -not have much trouble seeing their way. - -Reaching home, they found their parents just beginning to get alarmed -about them, fearing there had been some accident on the ice. The boys -told of their adventure, but in their own homes, with the lamps lighted, -and warm fires glowing, the encounter with the hermit did not seem so -terrible as it had at the time it happened. - -"If I see him again I'm going to speak to him," declared Sammy. "I'm -going to ask him why he doesn't want anybody on that part of the -island." - -"Better not," advised Sammy's father. "He may be harmless if let alone, -but his mind may be diseased, and if you annoy him he might do you some -harm." - -"Well, I'll ask Mr. Jessup, the hunter, about him then," decided Sammy, -and his father thought this might be all right. - -There were happy days in Fairview now. Winter had set in to stay, it -seemed, and there was skating and coasting enough to satisfy everyone. - -Sammy and his chums told their friends of their trip to Pine Island, and -of having seen the hermit, and several of the smaller boys of their -acquaintance shivered with fear. A number of the larger boys, including -Jed Burr, at once said they were going up and see if they could not find -the hermit themselves. - -Jed Burr, I might say, was quite a different boy now. He no longer was a -bully, tormenting those younger or weaker than himself. His suspension, -and the apology he had had to make, seemed to have taken good effect on -him. - -Then, too, he was looked upon somewhat as a hero, from having gone back -to rescue the little boy at the time when it was thought the school was -going to be toppled over by an earthquake. - -"I like Jed now," said Sammy, one day. - -"So do I," added Bob. - -"He's real kind," said Frank. "Yesterday I had to bring home from the -store a heavy basket of potatoes. Jed met me and carried it for me." - -And Jed himself was glad that he had "turned over a new leaf." He was -finding out that it is more fun, in the end, to be good than to be bad. -And Jed's teacher was glad, too, for he gave her less trouble. - -So, as I say, Jed and some of the bigger boys in the school, having -heard of the experience of Sammy and his chums, had decided to go to -Pine Island, to see if they could not find the hermit. - -"Will you come along, Sammy, and show us where you saw him?" asked Jed. - -"I will, if Bob and Frank will," was the answer. - -But Bob and Frank would not go, and Sammy would not go without them. So -Jed and his chums set off by themselves on their skates for Pine Island. -They were gone nearly the whole of one Saturday, but when they came back -they were disappointed, for they had seen nothing of the hermit. - -"I guess you fellows dreamed it," said Jed, with a laugh. "Or else you -saw shadows on the snow." - -"We did not dream it!" declared Sammy. - -"And can shadows holler at you?" Bob wanted to know. - -"No, but maybe you heard an echo," suggested Jed. - -"There couldn't be any echo unless somebody said something," spoke -Frank, "and we heard that hermit speak as plain as anything, and we -weren't saying a word." - -"Well, it's queer we didn't see him," returned Jed. - -Several days passed--days filled with many winter joys. Sammy and his -two chums made themselves skate-sails. They took some sticks, and -stretched cloth over them, something between the sail of a boat and a -kite in shape. Then, holding these sails in their hands, they would let -the wind blow them over the ice. Thus they could skate without getting -tired out. - -Then there were sleighing parties, and coasting races on the big hill -back of the schoolhouse. Sammy and his chums made themselves a bob, by -fastening two low clipper sleds together with a long plank. It had a -steering wheel, and a bell that sounded, as the bob went down hill, to -warn everyone to get out of the way. - -More snowball battles, and the building of snow houses and snow-men made -up other fun for the boys and girls. - -"I'm going to make the biggest snow house that ever was put up in -Fairview!" exclaimed Sammy, one day. Like everything else he did, or had -a part in, Sammy wanted his undertakings to be out of the ordinary. - -"All right, we'll help you," said Bob and Frank. - -They started the snow house in Sammy's yard, as he had proposed it. A -dozen large snowballs were rolled, and put in line on four sides of a -square. These were to be the walls of the house. The walls were made -quite high. Then inside of them was piled all the snow the boys could -gather. They cleared the ground for some distance about the house, and -Sammy's father said if only they would work as hard cleaning off the -sidewalks in winter, they would be doing a good thing. - -"But cleaning sidewalks isn't any fun," declared Sammy, and his chums -agreed with him. - -They were going to make a big snow pile inside the walls of balls, and -then hollow it out, leaving a roof of snow on top. This would be the -house. Besides the door, by which the snow would be shoveled out, there -were also to be windows. - -All went well for a time. Then, when the house was nearly finished, -Sammy's father came out to look at it. - -"You're making your roof too thin, boys," he said. "It will fall in on -you." - -"Oh, I guess not!" boasted Sammy. "We want to have the walls and roof -thin, as that gives us more room inside." - -"Well, you mind what I'm telling you," said Mr. Brown. - -Hardly had he spoken when Sammy, who was using his shovel to scrape some -snow from the ceiling of the house, sent his shovel right through the -roof. - -"Oh!" he cried. - -He did not have a chance to say anything more, for, just then, the whole -roof fell in, burying himself as well as Frank and Bob out of sight. - -"I told you so!" cried Mr. Brown. - -However, little harm was done, as the roof was too thin to hurt any of -the boys. They began to dig themselves out, with Mr. Brown's help, and -soon were outside the ruins of their snow house. - -"That's too bad," said Bob. - -"It sure is," agreed Frank. - -"And it was all my fault," admitted Sammy, with a sigh. - -"Never mind," went on Bob. "We can put boards across the walls, now, for -a roof, and cover them with snow." - -"I think that would be the safest plan," spoke Mr. Brown. The boys had -much fun after that, in their snow house. - -"Say, when are we going to take another trip to Pine Island, and look -for--" began Sammy Brown one day, about a week after the falling in of -the snow house roof. - -"Were you going to say look for the hermit?" asked Bob, with a laugh. - -"No, I meant Mr. Jessup, the hunter. I think it would be jolly to go up -and camp there." - -"It would," agreed Frank. "But we have to go to school. It wouldn't be -much fun just to go for one day. I'd like to stay a week." - -"Well maybe we could go when the Christmas vacation comes," suggested -Sammy. "I'm going to ask my folks, anyhow." - -"So will I!" cried Frank. - -"And I," added Bob. - -They were on their way home from school that afternoon, talking over the -proposed trip to Pine Island, when, as they came within sight of Rainbow -Lake, Sammy uttered a cry. - -"Look!" he exclaimed, pointing. "The ice must have all melted. There's a -sailboat on the lake!" - -"Sailboat! That isn't a sailboat!" said Bob. - -"No, it's an ice yacht!" cried Frank. "Come on down and let's see who -has it. Maybe they'll give us a ride." - -The boys broke into a run, and soon saw that what Frank had said was -true. It was an ice-boat--one built with runners, like big skates, and a -sail, fixed on a mast, standing up in a platform--shaped like a -triangle. The boat was skimming swiftly over the ice. - -"Say, that's all right!" cried Sammy. "I'm going to make one of those!" - -"There he goes again!" laughed Frank. - -"Well, I am--you'll see!" went on Sammy. "Come closer, and we'll look -how they're made. That seems to be a new kind." - -The three chums went out on the ice toward the skimming boat. - -Suddenly there was a cracking sound, a deep boom, like a shot from a -distant cannon, and a wide crack appeared in the ice, just in front of -the ice-boat. Before those aboard could turn aside, the front part of -the craft had slid into the cold waters of the lake, and several figures -were seen floundering about. - -"Come on!" cried Sammy, breaking into a run. "We've got to help save -them!" - - - - -CHAPTER VI - -A FINE CHANCE - - -The boys, following Sammy, broke into a run. With anxious eyes they -looked toward where the ice-boat had broken through a great crack in the -frozen surface of Rainbow Lake. - -"There's somebody climbing out!" cried Frank, as he saw a figure pull -itself up on the side of the overturned boat. - -"But there are some others there!" exclaimed Sammy. "We've got to save -them all! There's nobody else around!" - -It was true. That part of the lake was deserted at this moment. - -"How are we going to save them?" asked Bob, as he plodded on. - -"I don't know how, but we've got to do it!" panted Sammy. - -"Don't go too close, or the ice will give way with us," cautioned Frank. - -"I was thinking of that," answered Sammy. - -They were now nearing the boat. Part of it rested on firm ice, but the -front part sagged into the water, and the sail was half covered. Sitting -astride of the side of the craft was a boy whom Sammy and his chums -recognized as Jed Burr. - -"Anybody else there?" cried Sammy, as he came to a stop, and looked at -the ice to see if it would be safe to go further. - -"Yes!" cried Jed, as well as he could from shivering, for he was wet -through, and very cold. "Hank Blair is there, and Jim Eaton!" - -"Can you get 'em out?" asked Sammy. "Shall we run for help?" - -"Time help gets here they'll be gone!" groaned Jed. "Oh, why didn't I -see that crack?" - -"Help! Help us out!" came faintly from the black water that could be -seen through the opening of the ice. - -Sammy and his chums, looking under the mast of the overturned ice-boat, -saw two forms struggling in the water. Their hands clung to the edges of -the ice, only to have it break off in their grasp. Then they would bob -under again. - -"We've got to save them!" cried Sammy. - -"We can't!" moaned Bob. "Let's go for help!" - -"Can you reach them?" asked Sammy of Jed, paying no attention to what -Bob said. - -"I could if I had a rope to throw to them. But I can't get a rope! Oh, -what shall I do?" - -Sammy was doing some hard and quick thinking. Something like a rope was -needed so that Jed could hold one end and throw the other to the -floundering lads. A rope? Where could they get one now? True there were -ropes on the ice-boat, but they could not be reached. - -"I have it!" cried Sammy. "Our book straps! Quick, fellows, take the -straps off your books!" - -It was a bright idea. The straps were the very thing needed. - -Now it happened that Sammy and his chums had very long book straps, much -longer than were really needed. They were at least a yard in length, and -often only a few books were carried in them. But the boys had a habit of -also including their skates, and other playthings, in with their books, -so they declared that long straps were needed. - -Frank and Bob at once grasped Sammy's plan. In a trice they had loosed -the buckles, and handed him their straps. He fastened the three -together and thus had a leather rope almost ten feet long. - -"That's the idea!" cried Jed, still shivering on the side of the -ice-boat. "I can reach 'em with that!" - -"You'd better--better reach us--s-s-s-soon!" called Jim Eaton, his teeth -chattering with cold. - -"That's--ri-ri-right!" shivered Hank Blair. - -"Have you out in a jiffy now!" called Jed. "Throw me the strap, Sammy!" - -"I'll bring it to you," said Sammy. - -"No, don't. It mightn't be safe. The whole boat might slip into the -water." - -So Sammy tossed the three straps, fastened together as they were, to -Jed, who caught them. The next moment, holding firmly to one end, Jed -swung the other to Hank. Hank grasped it and carefully began to pull -himself forward so he could reach the edge of the ice-boat. A very -little help, from a person on a solid place, will allow a person in the -water to lift himself up. The water buoys him, so to speak. You boys who -have been in swimming know that if you keep low in the water you can -support yourself by merely placing one finger on the edge of a pier or a -boat. - -[Illustration: Sammy tossed the three straps, fastened together.] - -It was so with Hank. Slowly, by means of the straps, he was pulled up -until he could grasp the ice-boat. - -"I--I'm all right now," he panted. "Get after Jim!" - -He released his hold of the strap, and it was tossed to Jim. And not any -too soon, either, for Jim could not hold on much longer. He was weak -from the cold. - -But he, too, was soon safely towed to a place where he could grasp the -half-submerged ice-boat. All three was now comparatively safe. - -"Now look out!" called Jed, as he threw back to Tommy the buckled -straps. "I'm going to work my way to the solid ice, and you two fellows -follow. Can you do it?" - -"We've got to!" cried Jim, desperately. - -"Go ahead--I'm with you!" exclaimed Hank. - -Slowly Jed edged his way to where the stern of the ice-boat rested on -the solid, frozen surface. In a few seconds he was in safety, though he -was wet and shivering, and his clothes were beginning to freeze to him. - -"Come on!" he called to Hank and Jim, and they followed, but more -slowly, for they were quite exhausted. But soon they, too, were safe. - -"Oh, I'm so glad!" cried Sammy Brown. - -"So am I!" echoed his two chums. - -"And maybe we aren't also, youngsters!" chattered Jed, "We won't forget -this on your part!" - -"I should s-s-s-say n-n-n-not!" stammered Hank. "Those straps saved our -lives!" - -"Well, you'd better run home as soon as you can," advised Frank, "or -you'll catch your death of cold." - -"That's good advice," said Jed. "Come on. We can leave the ice-boat -where it is for a while. I'm going to run and see if I can get warmed -up. See you later, Sammy!" - -He set off on a trot toward shore, his two soaked friends following. -Sammy and his chums remained to look at the ice-boat. Some men and boys -came up then, too late, however, to help in the rescue. Then the men got -ropes and pulled the ice-boat up on the hard surface, whence it was -hauled to where it was kept tied up. Some of the ropes had broken, so -that it could not be sailed. - -"Sort of a queer accident," remarked Jerry Grow, who, with his dog -Prince, had come up with the crowd. "Those fellows could have sailed -almost anywhere else on Rainbow Lake and not gone through. But they had -to pick out a spot over a spring, where it never freezes very thick, -and of course they went through. There ought to be a mark put up here to -warn ice-boats and skaters to keep off." - -"We'll put one up," said Sammy, and a few days later they did mark the -danger spot in the ice. It had frozen over again, and could not have -been noticed except for the red box which Sammy and his chums placed -there. Thus further accidents were avoided. - -As for Jed and his companions, prompt action saved them from anything -worse than slight colds. They got home, took hot baths, drank plenty of -hot lemonade and, in a day or so, were out again. - -It appeared that the three larger boys had bought the ice-boat at -second-hand from a man in another town. It was the first time they had -tried it that they sailed over the thin ice, and went in. - -"But it won't happen again," said Jed to Sammy, when he and Jim and Hank -again met the three chums. "Thanks to you chaps we'll know where the -danger spot is now." - -"And thanks to them that we're not down there under the ice now," added -Hank, with a slight shiver. - -"That's right," chimed in Jim. "Say, any time you boys want a ride in -our ice-boat, let us know." - -"Sure enough!" exclaimed Jed. "Maybe you fellows would like to take a -sail. It's perfectly safe on the lake now, and we've fixed the boat -where she was broken that day." - -"Is the ice safe?" asked Sammy. - -"Sure," answered Jim. "It's frozen ever so much thicker than it was the -day we went out, and besides, we won't go near the danger spot. Don't -you want to come for a trip?" - -"Fellows, I've an idea!" cried Sammy, looking at his chums. - -"What, another?" asked Bob. - -"Yes," went on Sammy, with a grin. "This is a fine chance for us. -Christmas vacation starts next week. Why can't we go to Pine Island on -the ice-boat, camp there a few days with Mr. Jessup, and have Jed come -back for us--that is if he will?" and he looked at the former bully. - -"Of course we'll come for you!" he exclaimed. "We'd do anything for you -boys. We'll take you to Pine Island any time you say!" - -"Then it's all settled!" spoke Sammy, though it was far from that. -"We'll go camping with Mr. Jessup, and--we'll find out the secret of the -old hermit," he added in a whisper to his chums. - - - - -CHAPTER VII - -AT CAMP MYSTERY - - -"Sammy, do you really think we can do it?" - -"How did you happen to think of it?" - -Thus Frank and Bob questioned Sammy as they walked away from Jed and the -larger boys, after getting the promise of the use of the ice-boat any -time they wanted it. - -"Of course I think we can do it," answered Sammy. "And I don't just know -how I happened to think of it, except that I knew if we did go camping -on Pine Island we'd have to take some extra clothes with us, and maybe -something to eat, and we couldn't very well do that and skate. So I -thought of the ice-boat. It'll hold a lot." - -"It's a fine idea!" exclaimed Frank. "Now the next thing is to see if -our folks will let us go." - -The boys were a little worried about that part of the program. True, -they had been in a number of adventures of late, and their parents had -not objected to their going off on several trips during the Summer; -trips, too, that kept them away over night. - -But now it was Winter, and sleeping away from their warm beds might mean -severe colds, if nothing worse. So all three of the boys were a bit -doubtful about being allowed to go. - -"I'll tell you what let's do," proposed Sammy. - -"What?" asked Frank. - -"Let's go see Mrs. Blake," he went on. "We'll tell her we want to go up -and call on her brother. She said he'd be glad to have us, and we'll get -her to ask our folks if we can't go. They'll be sure to let us then." - -"Good idea, Sammy!" cried Frank. - -"I believe that will work!" declared Bob, slyly sticking out his foot to -trip up Sammy. But the latter was too quick for him, and it was Bob -himself who went down in a snowbank. - -"I--I'll wash your face for that!" he cried, as he scrambled to his feet -and made a rush for Sammy. But at that instant old Mr. Dolby, popularly -called a miser, came unexpectedly along, and Bob ran full tilt into him, -knocking him down. - -"Whew!" whistled Frank. "Now you have gone and done it!" - -The miserly old man struggled to his feet. All the boys were afraid to -go near to help him, for fear he would use his cane on them. - -"Ah, ha!" he spluttered as he got up, brushing the snow from his -clothes. "Ah, ha! Up to your old tricks again; are you? Knocking folks -down! I'll fix you for this! I'll have you all arrested, that's what I -will!" - -He shook his cane at the frightened boys. - -"I--I didn't mean to!" faltered Bob, as he picked up the angry man's hat -and gave it to him. - -"Didn't mean to! Humph! That's what ye allers say! But I'll have the law -on ye jest the same! I'll have ye all arrested! Look at my hat--all -snow!" - -"It'll brush off," said Sammy. - -"Hold your tongue! Don't speak to me!" snapped the angry man, as he -stalked off down the street. "I'll attend to your cases." - -For a moment the three chums remained looking after him. Then, as he -noted the direction taken by the miser, Frank said anxiously: - -"He's going toward the police station. Maybe he will have us arrested." - -"He can't have you two taken in," said Bob. "I'm the only one that -knocked him down." - -"Huh! S'pose we'd let you stand it all?" demanded Sammy. "We'll all -stick together. But come on. There's no use waiting for trouble. If he -does make a complaint let the officer find us. I'm going home and ask my -mother if I can go to Pine Island." - -He turned aside, but stopped a moment later to pick up a paper from the -snow. He unfolded it and exclaimed: - -"Why! it's a check--a check for ten dollars, and it's for Mr. Dolby! He -must have dropped it." - -"Say! This is just the thing!" cried Frank, with ready wit. "Let's run -and give it to him. Maybe he won't be mad then." - -There was no need to race after the old miser, for a moment later he -turned the corner, coming toward the boys. He seemed very much in a -hurry, and quite excited. - -"Have you found it? Did I drop it here? If you boys have found it and -don't give it up--" he spluttered. - -"Is this it?" asked Sammy quickly, holding out the check. - -The miser fairly snatched it from the boy's grasp. - -"That's it! Where'd you get it? You must have took it from my pocket -when you knocked me down!" the peevish man exclaimed. - -"We did not!" cried Sammy, in righteous anger. "We found it in the snow -where it fell. And knocking you down was an accident." - -Perhaps the miser realized this, or perhaps the joy at finding the ten -dollar check he thought he had lost made him more humane. At any rate he -growled out: - -"Well, maybe you couldn't help it. But you boys shouldn't be so rough. I -won't have you arrested this time, but I will next. I'm an old man, and -I can't stand bein' knocked around rough-like. Here--here's a penny for -you for findin' my check," and he fumbled in an old wallet. - -"No, thank you!" exclaimed Sammy, turning aside. "We don't want any -reward." - -"Oh, all right," said the miser, and with a sigh of relief he put the -cent back in his purse. "Boys have too much money now-a-days as it is." - -He shuffled off, followed by the indignant glances of the lads. - -"Isn't he the limit!" murmured Frank. - -"He sure is," agreed Bob. - -"You want to stop your fooling, Bob," advised Sammy. "You nearly got us -into trouble." - -"All right--I'll be good," promised the fun-loving Bob. But his chums -knew that it would be only for a short time at best. However, they were -used to it now. - -The three soon forgot the little happening with the miser, in their -hurry to get home and find out if they could go camping on Pine Island. -School would close for Christmas in a day or so, and there was much to -do to get ready. - -It was no easy matter for the boys to get their parents' consent to the -trip. They had to "tease" very hard. But their plan of getting Mrs. -Blake to put in a good word for them was not in vain. - -"Of course you ought to let the boys go," she said, when she called in -turn on Mrs. Bouncer, Mrs. Brown and Mrs. Haven. "My brother will be -delighted to see them, and he'll take the best of care of them. It will -do them good. They're only boys once, and they have studied well this -term." - -So it came about that permission was given. The boys were to take along -plenty of warm clothing. As for food, Mrs. Blake said her brother had -plenty in his cabin. She had written that the boys were coming, and he -had laid in a good stock of provisions. - -"Hurray!" cried Sammy, when the matter was settled, "we can go!" - -Arrangements were made, and Jed and his larger chums promised to take -the three boys to the island on the ice-boat. The lake was frozen over -thickly now, and there was no danger. - -School closed, Christmas came, with all its joys, and two days after the -holiday the little party of three, in charge of the older boys, set off -on the ice-boat. - -It was a fine sunny day, though cold, and there was a good wind, so they -were only a comparatively short time in getting to the upper end of Pine -Island. As they neared the dock in front of the cabin where Mr. Jessup -had his camp, Sammy and his chums kept a bright lookout. None of them -admitted as much, but they were all thinking they might see the -mysterious hermit. - -"There's your friend, I guess," said Jed, as the ice-boat came up into -the wind, and headed for the dock. "That's Mr. Jessup waving to you. I -know him." - -A tall man, with a gun under his arm, was standing on the edge of the -little pier that extended out into the frozen lake. - -"Yes, that's him," said Sammy, who knew the hunter from the way in which -Mrs. Blake had described her brother. - -"I wish we were you chaps," spoke Jim Eaton. "You'll have no end of good -times here." - -"That's what they will," added Hank. - -But neither they, nor Sammy and his chums, dreamed of the queer, as well -as good, times in store. - -The ice-boat came to a stop, the three small boys got off, and the craft -veered away again. - -"Well, boys, glad to see you!" called Mr. Jessup, cordially as he met -them. "Welcome to Camp Mystery!" - - - - -CHAPTER VIII - -THE OLD MANSION - - -Sammy Brown and his chums looked queerly at one another. Then they -glanced at Mr. Jessup. He smiled as he peered at them from under his -shaggy eyebrows. - -"Camp Mystery, did you say?" asked Sammy, wonderingly. - -"That's what I said," was the answer. "But don't get frightened, I don't -believe the mystery will hurt you." - -"Is there really a mystery?" asked Sammy, eagerly. "Is there a--a -ghost--or something like that?" - -Mr. Jessup laughed heartily. - -"No need to ask your name," he chuckled. "You're Sammy Brown? My sister -told me all about you." - -Sammy blushed. - -"Well--er--well," he stammered, "I only thought----" - -"No harm done at all!" went on the hunter, still laughing. "My sister -said one of you boys was always on the lookout for something strange, -like buried treasure, or a lost diamond mine. Well, we haven't got -either of those things on this end of Pine Island, whatever they may -have down below. But that's how I guessed your name, Sammy. - -"And now let me see, you ought to be Bob Bouncer, by rights," and he -looked at Bob with his head on one side. "How about it?" - -"That's my name," admitted the owner of it. - -"I thought so. Then of course, as you're the only one left," he said to -Frank, "you're Mr. Haven's son." - -"How did you guess my name?" asked Bob. - -"Oh, my sister said Bob was the one with a twinkle in his eye that meant -mischief. You've got it, so you're him. I hope you don't cut-up too -much. I don't mind sitting down on a pin once in a while, but I don't -like to find mud turtles in my bed----" - -"I don't do any of those things!" cried Bob, in confusion. - -"No, I s'pose you don't, but it's just as well to warn you," and by the -merry twinkle in Mr. Jessup's eyes the boys knew he was only joking. - -"Now then," he went on, "forward for Camp Mystery! Got all your -luggage?" - -"All we need, I guess," answered Sammy. Each of the boys had a -good-sized valise. "But what makes you call your place Camp Mystery?" -asked the lad. "Your sister didn't say anything about that." - -"No, for it's only lately that I've had occasion to call it that. You -see----" - -But Mr. Jessup was interrupted by a crashing sound in the underbrush at -one side of the path, and from the bushes there was shaken down a shower -of the light snow that had fallen the night before. - -"Look out!" cried Frank, starting back. - -"Maybe it's him!" added Bob. - -"Don't run!" advised Sammy. - -Mr. Jessup stared in surprise at the three lads, but before he could ask -them the reason for their strange remarks there burst out from the -bushes a fine hunting dog, who ran straight for the man, wagging his -tail in delight. - -"Oh, so there you are, Maybe!" exclaimed Mr. Jessup. "I was just -wondering what had become of you." - -"Is that your dog?" asked Sammy. - -"Did he make that noise?" inquired Frank. - -"Yes. What did you think it was--a ghost?" Mr. Jessup wanted to know. -Once more he looked strangely at the boys. - -"We--we thought," began Bob, and then he glanced at Sammy, as if asking -him to explain the thoughts of his chums. - -"Oh, you thought maybe it was the mystery; is that it?" Mr. Jessup -wanted to know. "No, it isn't that. The mystery, if that's what I am to -call it, doesn't make that much noise. It's a very quiet sort of a -mystery; the one in my camp." - -The boys were puzzled. Clearly there was more than one queer thing, to -be gotten to the bottom of, on Pine Island. - -The dog was frisking about, soon making friends with the boys. - -"Quiet now, Maybe," cautioned the hunter. "We can't scare up anything -to-day. Down, sir!" - -"Is--is his name Maybe?" asked Bob, thinking there might be a joke -attached to the animal's title. - -"It is," said Mr. Jessup. "You see I call him Maybe because when we go -out hunting--he and I--maybe we'll have luck, and--maybe we won't. It's -been mostly not, of late, though maybe my luck will change, now that you -boys have come. - -"But come. Tell me what you thought it was when you heard the dog make a -noise in the bushes." - -"And then will you tell us what the mystery is?" asked Sammy. - -"Of course. I'll tell you first, if you like. To be brief I've been -missing things from my camp--food mostly, though the other night one of -my best blankets was taken. And the funny part of it is that I can't get -a trace of the thief. Things disappear when I'm away from camp, and -sometimes when I'm asleep. It's all quite strange, so that's why I call -this Camp Mystery. I wish I could find out who is at the bottom of it." - -Sammy was eager to relate his story now. - -"Perhaps we can tell you!" he eagerly exclaimed, when Mr. Jessup nodded -to show that he had finished. "It must be the hermit who's taking your -things." - -If he and his chums expected Mr. Jessup to show surprise at the mention -of the hermit they were disappointed. Mr. Jessup only shook his head. - -"So you've seen him, too," he murmured. "He's showing himself more often -of late. I hope he doesn't get into trouble." - -"Who?" asked Frank. - -"The hermit." - -"Oh, then you know him?" asked Sammy. His expected surprise had amounted -to nothing. He was rather disappointed. - -"Oh, yes, I know him," admitted the hunter, "but that isn't saying I -know what he's up to. That part is queer, I admit." - -"Who is he?" asked Sammy, and he briefly told how they had encountered -the strange old man, with his white hair and beard. - -"Well, his name is Franklin Addison," answered Mr. Jessup, "and he has -been here for some time. Just when he came I don't remember, but I know -I ran across him one day, and he ordered me off the island. Of course I -didn't go, owning considerable land here. So I stood my ground, and -explained matters. - -"Then Mr. Addison grew more reasonable. He told me he had come to live -here to be away from the world, and he showed me a little hut he had -made for himself, on a small piece of land he said was his. A poor -enough place it is, but he seems to like it. Since then, though we -haven't met often, we have been better friends. I let him alone, and he -lets me alone. He lives about a mile from here, in a lonesome place. - -"What he is doing here I can't make out. Maybe he's here for his -health. There are some folks, you know, who believe in getting off alone -like that, and living as much out of doors as they can." - -"I thought maybe he was the mystery," explained Sammy, "and that he had -been taking your things." - -"No," answered the hunter, "Mr. Addison wouldn't do a thing like that. -He has often asked me for food, and I have given it to him. Then again -he has given me money to buy things for him when I go to the mainland. -He isn't the thief, I'm sure." - -"Maybe it's a bear--or some wild animal," suggested Bob. - -"I wish it was!" exclaimed the hunter. "If it was maybe we could get -it--Maybe and I. But there are no animal tracks, and anyhow the biggest -beasts here on Pine Island now are foxes. No you'll have to guess again, -boys." - -"Well, it will give us something to look up," said Sammy. "We can solve -that mystery, and the one about the hermit, too." - -He was quite delighted over the prospect, as his chums could easily tell -by the light in his eyes. Give Sammy a mystery, or put him on the trail -of buried treasure, be it ever so small, and he was happy. - -"Well, come on to Camp Mystery," suggested Mr. Jessup. "You must be -hungry--I know I am." - -With Maybe, the dog, running on ahead, and the hunter and the boys -bringing up in the rear, the little procession started off along the -snowy trail. - -They went on for perhaps a mile, when, through the trees, the boys -caught sight of a large house--a mansion in size. - -"Is that your cabin?" asked Sammy. "It's big!" - -[Illustration: "Is that your cabin?" asked Sammy.] - -"No, my shack can't compare with that in build," answered the hunter. -"That's an old deserted mansion. It used to be a sort of hotel, or -boarding house, but it hasn't been used as such in a good many years. It -didn't pay. - -"I'm a sort of care-taker of it, and I have one or two rooms fitted up -that I use when my shack gets filled. But the rest of the place is -deserted, except for the bats and rats." - -The boys came to a stop in front of the old house. It was bare and -gaunt, and looked lonesome. On most of the windows the sagging shutters -flapped dismally. Somehow there seemed an air of mystery about the -place. Sammy Brown's spirits rose. - -"Fellows!" he cried, "maybe the mystery is in here!" - - - - -CHAPTER IX - -SAMMY'S QUEER FIND - - -"Ha! Ha!" laughed Mr. Jessup. "My sister was right about you, Sammy! -You're always on the lookout for something odd." - -Sammy was a little put out by the attention he had drawn to himself. But -for all of that, he was not going to back down. - -"Well," he said, "I only thought that if queer things had been going on -around your camp, Mr. Jessup, maybe the person who had been taking your -things would be hiding in here." - -"So you're sure it's a person, and not a ghost; eh?" asked the hunter, -with a smile. - -"I don't believe in ghosts," declared Sammy. - -"Good boy! Neither do I. But I'm sorry I can't agree with you that the -mystery is in this old mansion." - -"Why?" asked Sammy, who liked to stick to a point. - -"Because the hermit and I, so far as I know, are the only ones on this -part of the island. If there was anyone else here Maybe would have -routed him out long ago; wouldn't you, Maybe?" - -The dog barked, and wagged his tail. - -But Sammy Brown was not satisfied. The old mansion, that had been used -for a hotel, when the upper part of Pine Island had been a Summer -resort, looked strange enough to hide any sort of a mystery, and the boy -made up his mind he would get at the bottom of this one. - -"We've got two things to do while we're here," Sammy told himself. "One -is to find out who has been taking Mr. Jessup's stuff, and the other is -to find out what the hermit is doing here." - -Instead of being worried over the seemingly hard work, Sammy Brown was -delighted. It gave him a chance to do something, and this always pleased -the lad. - -"Well," said Mr. Jessup, after a pause, "there's no need of staying here -unless you want to. Better come on to my cabin, and we'll have a meal. -Then you can unpack, and get your bearings. Are you warm enough?" - -"Oh, yes, indeed!" exclaimed Frank. "Mother made me put on my heavy -clothes." - -"Well, it's a good idea, for it often gets quite chilly on the island. -Now then, forward march!" - -Sammy hung back a little. - -"What's the matter?" asked Mr. Jessup, looking at him. "Do you see -anything?" - -"No," was the answer, "but I'd like a chance to go through that deserted -mansion." - -"Oh, you'll get it all right enough," the hunter promised him. "I've got -to straighten up the few rooms I use in a day or so, and you boys can -help. - -"You see," he explained, "I'm expecting a company of gentlemen up in -about two weeks to stay a few days, and there'll be more of them than I -can keep in my cabin. So I've got to use a few rooms in the old mansion. -I'll have to clean them up a bit though, first." - -"Maybe we'll be in the way then," suggested Bob. - -"Bless your heart, no! They're in no hurry to come, and I'm going to -give you boys a good time first, just as I promised my sister I would. -You did her a good turn, and this is the only way I can pay you back. - -"So don't worry. Stay as long as you like, and you'll have all the -chance you want, Sammy, to go through the old house. You won't find -anything, though, I'll wager." - -Sammy said nothing, but he made up his mind that if there was anything -in the deserted mansion that would solve the mystery he would find it. - -A short time later Mr. Jessup's cabin was reached. It stood in the midst -of a grove of trees, and through them a glimpse could be had of the -frozen lake. This part of the island was separated from the portion -where the boys had played Robinson Crusoe by a wide stretch of -marshland. - -"Which way is the hermit's cabin from here?" asked Sammy, when he and -his chums had put away the clothes they had brought in their satchels. - -"Right back of here," answered Mr. Jessup. "But I wouldn't advise you to -try to find it alone. There's a bad, swampy bog near it, and you might -get mired." - -"Wouldn't it be frozen over now?" asked Frank. - -"No; and that's the funny part of it. That bog never freezes, even in -the coldest weather. It's down in a sort of valley, and it's protected. -So keep away from there unless I'm with you. There's another reason, -too, for not looking up Mr. Addison." - -"What is it?" asked Sammy, while the other boys waited eagerly for the -answer. - -"Well, he's a queer sort of man," went on Mr. Jessup. "He doesn't like -company, and he even objects to me, sometimes, though I seldom bother -him. Just how he would take to you boys I don't know." - -"He didn't take to us at all the first time he saw us," spoke Bob. - -"I should say not!" cried Frank. "He ordered us away." - -"And we went--in a hurry," added Sammy. - -"Yes," remarked the hunter, with a smile. "Then I'd give him a wide -berth. I don't just know what his rights are on this island. I know he -doesn't bother me, and he keeps off my land, except when he wants to -borrow something, or have me buy food for him. So I don't bother him, -and I'd advise you boys to do the same." - -"All right," answered Sammy. He did not exactly promise, and the truth -of the matter was that he made up his mind to find out more about the -queer hermit, as well as about the mystery and the deserted mansion, as -soon as he could. - -And his chums felt the same way. - -"Well, anyhow, we're here!" exclaimed Sammy, a little later, while they -sat about a campfire in front of the cabin, and ate the meal which Mr. -Jessup got ready. "We're here, and we're going to have some fun!" - -"That's what we are!" cried Frank. "What can we do first?" - -"Well, I'm going to do a little hunting for rabbits this afternoon," -said Mr. Jessup. "You boys can come along, if you like." - -"Fine!" cried Sammy. - -"I wish we had guns and could hunt," said Sammy. - -"You're a bit too young for firearms," said the hunter. "Later on, when -you grow up, you can have 'em, and I'll show you how to shoot." - -With this the boys had to be content, though it must be confessed they -looked on with eager and envious eyes while Mr. Jessup got his gun ready -for the little expedition. - -Maybe, the dog, as soon as he saw the preparations, frisked about in -delight. He barked, and ran to and fro from the cabin, as if asking -everyone to hurry. - -"All right, old fellow," said Mr. Jessup, soothingly. "We'll soon be -with you." - -Pine Island, as I have said, was a large one in the midst of Rainbow -Lake. Years before, many years, when only the Indians roved about that -part of the country, it had been part of the main land, so scientists -said. They had located a reef in the lake, and their explanation was, -that, through the raising of the waters of the lake, the point of land -became surrounded by water, and was made into an island. - -It had happened suddenly, and many large, wild animals, as well as some -smaller ones, had been trapped there. In time the wild animals, such as -deer and bears, had been killed off, and were never replenished. But the -small game, such as rabbits, squirrels, opossums and raccoons, were -still rather plentiful. The island was protected by game laws, now, so -that the supply was not killed off. - -Then, too, there was some valuable timber on the island, and Mr. Jessup -cut that in the Summer when there was no hunting. He floated it down to -Fairview where he sold it. - -Off through the snow-covered woods started Mr. Jessup and the boys, with -Maybe frisking about here and there, trying to scare up a rabbit or a -partridge for his master to shoot. For a time luck was poor, and then -some pheasants were flushed, and Mr. Jessup brought down two fat ones. - -"Hurray!" cried Bob. "Now we'll have a fine dinner!" - -Later on the hunter got two fine rabbits, and oh! how the boys wished -they were big enough to have guns! - -"I'm coming up here every hunting season, as soon as I'm old enough to -shoot!" cried Frank. - -"So am I!" exclaimed Sammy and Bob. - -As he did not shoot game to sell, and as he had enough for present -needs, Mr. Jessup, as all good hunters do in such cases, ceased the use -of his gun. With his rabbits and pheasants on his back he led the boys -on the return trip. As they came to the old mansion, Sammy asked: - -"Could we go in now, Mr. Jessup, and look around?" - -"I guess so," he answered. "But don't stay too late. It gets dark early -now, you know. I'll keep on to my cabin." - -Eagerly the boys entered the old deserted house, Mr. Jessup letting them -take his key. As he had said, they found several rooms fitted up with -beds, and a few pieces of furniture. These were the apartments used by -those of the hunting parties who could not find bunks in the cabin. - -"Now let's begin at the top of the house, and work down," proposed -Sammy, when they had looked about the lower floor. "Maybe we can find -something of the mystery." - -"Maybe--the dog--yes," laughed Bob. - -"Oh, you just wait!" exclaimed Sammy. "I'll find something yet." - -But it did not seem that he was going to, at first. Room after room was -deserted, the once gay wallpaper hanging in mouldy strips. Broken -shutters flapped in the wind, and there was ruin on all sides. In some -rooms were bits of broken furniture, and in others only heaps of -rubbish. - -"I shouldn't like to stay here," said Bob, with a little shiver. - -"Me, either," added Frank. - -They were up in the top story now, and had found nothing. - -"Well, I suppose we may as well go down," spoke Sammy, in disappointed -tones. "There's nothing here." - -"Unless it's in one of those secret rooms you read about," said Bob. -"This mansion looks old enough to have one of those." - -Sammy did not reply. He was looking at a spot on the wall, and suddenly -he put forth his hand and pressed on a carved bit of moulding. - -To his surprise, as well as to the surprise of his chums, the wall -seemed to slide away. There was a rumbling sound, and a hole came into -view. - -Then, as the boys' eyes became used to the gloom, they saw that they -were looking into a room of the existence of which they had never -guessed. - -"Look!" cried Bob excitedly. "Sammy's found it--the secret room!" - -"Yes, and see what's in it!" cried Sammy, as he pointed to a heap of -odd-looking objects in one corner. "Fellows, maybe this is the mystery!" - - - - -CHAPTER X - -THE MYSTERIOUS ROOM - - -The boys hung back for a moment on the threshold of the room Sammy had -so strangely discovered. Truth to tell they were a little afraid to -enter, and no one could have blamed them. For surely there were some -queer looking objects in the secret apartment. - -That it was a secret room, intended to be hidden from the ordinary -person going through the old house, was plain. As one looked at the -wall, before Sammy had pushed on what must have been a secret spring, it -did not seem different from the rest of the building. There had been a -little piece of carved wood sticking out, and this must have worked on -some springs and levers to slide back the hidden door. - -"Say, this is great!" cried Sammy, delighted at his discovery. - -"It sure is," agreed Bob. "How'd you come to do it?" - -"I just happened to," answered Sammy. "I saw that carved wood bulging -out, and it looked as though it was meant to press on. So I did." - -"You're a great one!" cried Frank. "You're all the time talking about -finding something mysterious, but it never before amounted to anything. -This time you did hit it, Sammy Brown!" - -"And I guess you fellows won't laugh at me any more; will you?" - -"I won't," said Bob, with a sigh, wishing he had discovered the secret -room. - -"And look what's in there, fellows!" went on Sammy. "Maybe now we can -find out how and who has been taking Mr. Jessup's stuff!" - -There was indeed an odd collection of things in the secret room. Besides -a bed, table and some chairs, there was on the floor, and on the -wall-shelves, some tubes, with shining pieces of glass in the ends. -There were tin boxes, springs, long pieces of wire, black wooden boxes, -and many other strange things. One of the tubes, with a glass in the -end, seemed to be pointed directly at the boys, like some strange gun. - -"Come on, let's go in!" urged Sammy. "Let's see what those things are." - -For a moment his two chums looked at him, and then Frank said: - -"Do you think it's safe to go in?" - -"Why not?" asked Sammy. - -"Well, that door might suddenly slide shut while we were in there, or -there might be a false bottom to the floor, and we'd drop through, or -something like that," suggested Bob. - -"Huh! You're as bad as you say I am, in thinking up things!" cried -Sammy. "I say let's go in. We can put a stick, or something, across the -sliding door, so that can't go shut on us." - -"Well, maybe that's all right," agreed Bob. "But it sure would be hard -luck if we got caught in here. No one would ever know where to find us." - -"That's right," admitted Sammy, and, for a second or two, he was almost -ready to give up the adventure. - -But his desire to see what the strange things were was so strong that he -decided, by taking care, it would be all right. - -"Oh, come on, fellows," he exclaimed. "Let's take a chance! I'll fix the -door." - -They found a piece of a broken shutter which they wedged across the -sliding doorway so that, even if they, or someone else, accidentally -touched the hidden spring which sent the door to and fro, they would not -be trapped. - -"There, I guess that's all right," cried Sammy. "Now come on in!" - -But Bob still hung back, though Sammy stepped across the door sill. - -"Well, what's the matter now?" asked the discoverer of the hidden room. - -"I'm thinking that the floor might give way," faltered Bob. - -"Nonsense!" exclaimed Frank, taking sides with Sammy. "It must be solid, -or how would it hold up the tables, chairs and the other things? I'm -going in." - -Bob would not be left behind, in the mysterious old house, so he -followed his chums into the room. They advanced cautiously, and listened -closely. There was no clicking sound, that might tell of hidden -machinery. - -"Pshaw! It's all right!" exclaimed Sammy, presently. "Now to see what -those things are." - -"Who do you s'pose put 'em there?" asked Frank, as they advanced toward -the odd collection of things on the table. - -"Counterfeiters!" exclaimed Sammy, promptly. - -"Counterfeiters!" cried Frank. "What do you mean?" - -"Just what I said," answered Sammy, with a calm smile, as though he knew -it all. "This is a hidden place where some men have been making false -coins, and maybe bad paper money too." - -"You mean money that's no good?" asked Bob. - -"Sure," replied Sammy. "Money that looks good, but which -isn't--counterfeit money. I've read a lot about it. Fellows, we have -discovered a counterfeiters' den!" - -Sammy's chums looked rather frightened. It did seem as though they had -stumbled upon some strange "den." - -"Well, if counterfeiters work here, where are they, and where is some -of the false money?" asked Bob. "I'd like to see some." - -"Pooh! You don't s'pose they'd leave it around loose; do you?" asked -Sammy. "They go out to spend it. That's probably where they are now. -We'd better hurry and look around, and then we can go back to town and -tell the police!" - -Frank looked as though he did not quite agree with Sammy. It was often -this way with the excitable small chap. He saw some things and imagined -the rest. But in this case it was different. He had really discovered a -secret room, and this was more than his chums had done. Perhaps, after -all, he was right about the counterfeiters. - -The boys advanced farther into the room. A nearer view of the strange -tubes, with the glass in the ends, showed the latter to be large and -bulging, like the lens of a bull's-eye lantern, or an automobile lamp. -Attached to the tubes were black boxes, with a number of springs and -levers fastened to them. - -"Ha! I know what these are!" cried Frank. "They're telescopes, that's -what they are. This isn't a counterfeiters' place at all. It's where one -of those men live who look at the stars--astro--astor--Oh, you know what -I mean," he added quickly. - -"Astronomers," said Bob. "That's what it is, Sammy." - -"It is not!" declared Sammy, quickly, bound not to give up his -sensational idea. "Those may be telescopes all right, but if they are, -the counterfeiters use them to look and see if the police are coming." - -"Say, maybe that's right," agreed Frank, with a look of admiration at -Sammy. "I never thought of that." - -"Pooh! I did!" exclaimed the lad who had found the secret room. He was -not going to lose any chance of showing off, now that he had the -opportunity. "That's what they are--telescopes for spying out when the -counterfeiters are at work." - -There were several small windows in the secret room, and they were -rather high up from the floor. In fact Sammy and his chums had to drag -out boxes to stand on, in order to see above the sills. - -They paused a moment in looking over the strange apparatus to glance at -the furniture in the room. As I have said, there was a bed, a table and -several chairs. The bed did not look very nice, being covered with old -blankets and some cut-up bags for covers. But it appeared to have been -slept in, and was not actually dirty. In fact it was no worse than the -place where the boys had slept when they were wrecked on the other end -of Pine Island in the Summer. - -"I wonder if they live here all the while?" spoke Bob. - -"I guess they stay here when they're not away getting rid of the bad -money," said Sammy. "They may come back any minute. We'd better be -getting out of here!" - -"Let's look around a little more," proposed Bob, who was getting braver -now. "What can you see from the windows?" - -The boys looked out. The windows of the secret room gave a view of only -a dense mass of trees, and it was plain that this was the reason no one -had ever found the apartment before. That side of the old mansion was -opposite a deep and seldom-visited part of the woods. - -"Well, we'll look at the counterfeiting machinery a little more, and -then we'll go," suggested Sammy. "We'd better tell Mr. Jessup about -this, and he can get the police after these fellows." - -This seemed good advice to his chums, and they went back again to the -table and shelves where the apparatus was spread out. They now examined -it all more closely. - -"Better not touch anything," advised Sammy, as Bob put out his hand to -examine one of the tubes with glass in the end. - -"Why not?" was asked. - -"Because you might get a shock." - -"A shock? How do you make that out?" - -"Why there's some electric batteries attached to the things," said -Sammy, pointing out the dry cells in their red pasteboard boxes. - -"That's right," agreed Frank. "They're the same kind of batteries Jerry -Grow has in his motor-boat. And they can give you a fierce shock, too." - -"What, those little things?" asked Bob, in surprise. - -"Sure," spoke Sammy. "You see the batteries aren't so strong in -themselves, but when you run the current through a production coil----" - -"Induction coil--not production," corrected Frank. - -"Well, induction coil then," went on Sammy. "When the current from the -electric battery goes through that, it gets stronger, and it sure does -hurt." - -"I know it does," agreed Bob, "for I got stung once on Jerry's boat, -when he was putting in some new batteries. Oh, I won't touch these!" - -Look as they did at the strange apparatus, the boys could not understand -what it was for, unless, as Sammy said, it was used for making false -money. Of course the chums had never seen any machinery for that -purpose, and had no idea what was necessary. But Sammy's idea appealed -to them. - -"I guess we'd better be getting out now," said Frank, after a bit. "I -shouldn't like to be caught here." - -"Me either!" agreed Bob. "Let's go." - -The boys started out of the mysterious room, excited over their strange -find, Sammy in particular. This trip to Pine Island was going to be -more sensational than their previous one. They were sure of that. - -"What'll we do about the door; leave it open?" asked Frank. - -"No, we'll close it," decided Sammy, "that is if we can. Then the -counterfeiters won't know we've been here, and they'll come back to -their den, and we can help the police capture them." - -"That's the way to talk!" cried Bob. "You're all right, Sammy!" - -And then something happened. How it came about none of the boys knew, -but Sammy admitted afterward that he must have touched one of the wires, -or springs. - -At any rate there was a blinding flash, a great cloud of white smoke -shot out, and a loud boom. - -[Illustration: There was a blinding flash.] - -"An explosion!" yelled Sammy. - -"They're shooting at us!" cried Bob. - -"Come on--get out of here!" gasped Frank, as they made their way through -the blinding and choking vapor to where they imagined the secret door to -be. - - - - -CHAPTER XI - -THE STRANGE HERMIT - - -"Come on, fellows, this way!" - -"No, over this way!" - -"I tell you the door's here!" - -Thus cried Bob, Sammy and Frank as they stumbled about in the mysterious -smoke-filled room. They banged into the bed, tripped over chairs, and -slammed into the table. - -"Look out, don't go near those things again!" warned Sammy. - -"We won't--if we know it!" panted Frank. "Where is that door?" - -"Maybe--maybe the explosion slid it shut!" cried Bob. - -This thought caused terror in the hearts of the boys until Sammy with a -joyful cry, shouted: - -"It's all right! Here's the door still open! Come on!" - -Out they rushed, following Sammy's lead, for the smoke had now cleared -away enough for them to see in the dim room. - -They never paused to take away the piece of broken shutter that held -open the secret sliding door, or panel in the wall. They had no desire, -now, to leave things as they had found them, in hopes that the -mysterious person, or persons, who used the strange room, would come -back, unsuspecting, and be caught. All the boys cared about now was to -get away. - -Down the attic stairs they rushed, and they never paused until they were -safely out of the old house. Then, some distance off, the fright left -them, and they halted to look back. - -"What happened?" panted Sammy. - -"It was an explosion," decided Frank. - -"No, those counterfeiters must have come back and shot at us," gasped -Bob. - -"Go on! You're worse than Sammy," said Frank, who was more calm than his -chums. "It was some sort of explosion. Maybe it was powder the men left -there, or it might have been some of the chemicals they use, in whatever -they do, whether it's making bad money, or something else. Anyhow it was -just an explosion. There was no one in that room but ourselves." - -"Well, I guess that's right," agreed Bob, when he had thought it over a -bit. "But who exploded it?" - -"Maybe I did," admitted Sammy, slowly. "I know just before that flash -and puff came, I touched one of the wires on those telescope things. -There was a click, and it went off--all at once!" - -"I should say it did," spoke Frank. "It went off fast enough." - -"And there was an awful lot of smoke!" added Bob. - -"Well, I'm glad we're out of the place," said Sammy. "Come on, now, it's -getting late, and Mr. Jessup may be worried about us. We'd better go -tell him about what we found." - -"And then get the police after those counterfeiters," said Bob. "They -had no right to explode stuff at us that way." - -"Well, they may claim we had no right to go in their room," went on -Frank, "but I guess they won't--that is if we get them. Well, come on." - -"I'll tell you what let's do," proposed Sammy. "Let's see if we can -locate the windows of that room from the outside. We might want to point -out to Mr. Jessup where they are." - -"That's a good idea," agreed Frank. - -But it could not be done, for the boys found it impossible to get -through the thick underbrush on that side of the old mansion. They might -have managed it in broad daylight, but it was now getting dark, and they -did not want to take any chances. - -"The best thing we can do," said Sammy, "is to go to Mr. Jessup right -away, and tell him about what happened. He'll know what's best to do." - -To this Frank and Bob had no objection, and with a last look at the -queer old house, the boys found the trail leading to Camp Mystery, and -hurried along it. - -On the way they talked over what they had seen and what had happened to -them. Try as they might, they could not explain it. Sammy was sure they -had discovered a counterfeiters' den, but neither Frank nor Bob would -admit that this was positively so, though they agreed that it all looked -very strange. - -Frank did not say so, but he kept thinking that so many queer things -which Sammy had discovered had turned out to be only commonplace after -all, that now he feared this one would, also. Still he had to admit that -the finding of the secret room was rather strange. - -"There's the cabin!" exclaimed Sammy, as they came in sight of it. - -"Yes, and there's Maybe, the dog, but I don't see any signs of Mr. -Jessup," spoke Bob. - -"I guess he's inside, getting supper," suggested Frank. "I hope he -is--I'm as hungry as one of the bears that used to live on Pine Island." - -"So am I," admitted Bob. "I'd like some nice hot pancakes, the kind Mr. -Jessup makes, and some of his baked potatoes." - -"Don't talk about it--I'm so hungry!" laughed Frank. - -They kept on toward the cabin. Maybe rushed out to meet them, barking -and wagging his tail, to show how glad he was to see them. But Mr. -Jessup did not appear. - -Somehow a sense of fear came over the boys. They did not know why, but -the strange experience they had just gone through had made them nervous, -and not seeing Mr. Jessup at once, added to their fears. - -"I wonder where he can be?" asked Sammy, looking around the cabin. There -was no sign of their friend. - -"Maybe he's off hunting," suggested Frank. - -"Why, he just came back from a trip," spoke Bob. "I guess you forgot -that." - -"I sure did," admitted Frank. "But so many things have happened in the -last hour that it's no wonder. There's the game he shot," and he pointed -to the rabbits and the birds. - -"Yes, and there's a note on them!" cried Sammy. "Fellows, it's for us. -Look it's addressed to the 'Fairview Boys.' I'll read it." - -Which he did quickly enough. The note said: - - - "Dear Boys: I have been called over to the mainland to see my - sister. She was taken suddenly ill. I will be back before long. - Don't worry, and get the best supper you can. I know you can cook - it. - - PETER JESSUP." - - -For a moment the boys felt much disappointed, and not a little alarmed. -Then their spirits rose. - -"Well, it's too bad Mrs. Blake is sick," said Sammy, slowly, "but I -guess we can manage without Mr. Jessup. We sure can get up a good meal. -There's plenty of stuff." - -"And we'll have roast pheasant and stewed rabbit!" cried Bob, who was -fond of eating. - -"No, we'd better leave them until Mr. Jessup gets back," suggested -Frank. "I don't believe he'd like us to touch his game. He'll probably -be back before it gets very late." - -"And maybe he'll be hungry too," said Bob. "We'll cook enough to save -him some." - -"Then let's get right at it!" suggested Sammy. "Those counterfeiters -will have to wait," and he laughed. All the boys were feeling better -now, especially since they were in their own camp. And if Mr. Jessup was -not there, they had good old dog Maybe, who frisked about, glad of the -company of the boys. It must have been hard for him to stay behind when -his master left. - -Sammy and his chums were soon busy over the meal. They had been camping -before, several times, and were getting to be quite expert. One made the -fire, another got the meat and potatoes ready, while Frank opened a can -of baked beans to warm in a frying pan over the stove, the fire being -made there instead of outside, though later the boys intended to kindle -a camp blaze in front of the cabin. - -"Well, this is something like!" exclaimed Sammy, as they sat about the -table, after supper, the lamp glowing on their shining faces. - -"That's right!" said Frank. - -"It's nice and cozy in here," agreed Bob. - -They had kindled a fire outside, and sat about that for a while, waiting -for the sound of Mr. Jessup's return. Then as it grew later, and colder, -they went inside. - -"He may not come until nearly midnight," said Sammy. - -"Oh, well, we won't sit up for him," suggested Frank. "I'm tired and -sleepy. I'm going to turn in soon. Maybe will stand guard for us, won't -you old fellow?" - -The dog barked his answer. - -A fire was kindled on the hearth, and the boys sat about this for a -while, talking over what had occurred since their arrival at Camp -Mystery. Then, as they were very sleepy, they locked up, leaving Maybe -stretched out before the glowing fire, and turned into the bunks. - -Contrary to their expectations, nothing happened all night. In fact they -did not wake up until morning, when the sun was streaming into the -cabin. Then Sammy jumped up, looked at the clock, and cried: - -"After eight; and Mr. Jessup isn't home yet!" - -"Maybe his sister is worse," suggested Frank. "Let's get breakfast, and -then we can decide on what to do." - -They made a good meal, and then, after talking matters over, they made -up their minds that the best thing to do would be to take a walk about -the island. If they saw no signs of Mr. Jessup by noon, they planned to -go over to the mainland, and perhaps give up their camp at Mystery, to -go home. - -"For, though we'd like to stay here alone, first rate," said Sammy, "our -folks might not like it, or think it safe. They let us come because they -thought Mr. Jessup was going to be with us, and if he isn't, we ought to -go home." - -"I s'pose so," sighed Bob, "but it's mighty jolly here." - -"Even with the old hermit, and the counterfeiters," spoke Frank. - -"Oh, the old hermit never will bother us," declared Sammy. "And maybe -the counterfeiters have been gone a long time." - -"And maybe Mr. Jessup will send someone to stay with us, if he can't -come back himself," went on Bob. "Then we could stay all right." - -"Say, that would be fine!" cried Frank. "It may happen, too. We'll wait -a bit about going back." - -They decided this would be a fair thing to do, and, after putting the -cabin to rights, after their morning meal, and planning what they would -have for dinner, they set out for a tramp about the island, Maybe the -dog going with them. - -They went on for half a mile, when Bob, who was in the lead, suddenly -stopped, and called out: - -"There's somebody moving over there!" - -"Over where?" asked Sammy. - -"There," answered Bob, pointing to a clump of trees, at the foot of -which was a bank of snow. "I just saw a man." - -"Maybe it's Mr. Jessup," spoke Frank. - -"I hope so," murmured Sammy. "I'd like to get after those men who live -in the secret room." - -And then, as the boys watched, the figure of an old man came out from a -clump of bushes. The man had a long white beard, and white hair, and as -he came into a little opening he looked in the direction of the boys. - -"The old hermit!" whispered Frank. "There he is!" - -And, as the boys looked, the aged man, about whom there seemed to be -such a mystery, shook his fist at them, and then disappeared behind a -clump of bushes. - - - - -CHAPTER XII - -INTO THE DRIFT - - -"That sure was him!" - -"Yes, he's the old hermit!" - -"I wonder what he's up to now?" - -In turn Sammy, Bob and Frank spoke, as they looked toward the place -where the aged man had disappeared. They could still see the bushes -shaking as he forced his way through them. - -"I wish it had been Mr. Jessup," said Sammy, and he could not help -sighing a bit. - -"Yes, we need him," added Bob. "But we'll do the best we can. If he -doesn't come by night, I s'pose we'll have to go back home." - -"And I sure will hate to do that," put in Sammy Brown. "Maybe there'll -be a way out." - -For a moment the boys looked at one another, and then at the spot where -the hermit had vanished. Maybe barked once or twice, and then began -running about, as he had been doing ever since he came out with the -boys, hoping perhaps to scare up a rabbit. - -Sammy was doing some hard thinking. His eyes blinked fast, as they -always did when he had several ideas going through his mind at the same -time. Suddenly he exclaimed: - -"Fellows, are you with me?" - -"With you? In doing what?" asked Frank. - -"In following that old hermit? I want to see where he goes." - -Neither Bob nor Frank answered for a moment. - -"Well, he's probably going to his cabin, or cave, or whatever he lives -in," Bob finally said: "We know about where it is, and I don't see any -good in following him. He might get mad at us." - -"He probably would," said Sammy. "But getting mad wouldn't hurt us. I'd -like to see where he goes." - -"Why?" asked Bob. - -"I have a certain reason," went on Sammy. "Do you know, fellows, the -hermit may be the--counterfeiter!" - -"What!" cried Bob. - -"Do you mean that?" inquired Frank. - -"Well, I'm not sure, of course," went on Sammy. "But he might be, you -know." - -"Yes, of course," laughed Frank, "and the time we thought we had struck -a bear here, it might have been one, only--it wasn't!" - -"Oh, well, of course anyone can make a mistake," said Sammy. "And I'm -not saying I'm right. Only it's worth trying; isn't it?" - -"Well, maybe so," replied Frank, slowly. - -"All I want to do," went on Sammy, "is to follow the old hermit, and see -what he does. If he goes toward the place where we found the secret -room, and the queer things, we'll know he has something to do with -them." - -"Maybe," put in Frank, with a laugh. He did not always agree with Sammy. - -"Oh, of course, I'm not saying for sure," went on the other. "But will -you come?" - -"I don't mind," spoke Frank, after a few moments' thought. "But we'd -better not go too close." - -"That's what I say," added Bob. "He might try to harm us." - -"We've got Maybe with us," said Sammy, boldly. "I'm not afraid." - -And so the boys decided on Sammy's plan, little thinking what would come -of it. - -They could no longer see the hermit, but they thought they could trace -which way he went by following the tracks in the snow. - -"Besides, we have the dog with us," added Sammy, "and he can follow. He -can track the hermit just like he does a rabbit." - -The boys went on cautiously. They did not want to get too close to Mr. -Addison, who, though he was an old man, might be one who was very easily -made angry, and who might work some harm to them. In fact they already -knew that he lost his temper easily. - -For perhaps half a mile they followed the tracks of the aged man through -the snow. This was easy to do since he tramped over a place where the -white crust was unbroken by other footsteps. The dog, too, led them by -sniffing at the trail on the ground. But they had had no sight of Mr. -Addison since he had disappeared into the bushes after shaking his fist -at them. - -"He isn't going toward the old house," said Sammy, after a bit. - -"No, he's heading in the wrong direction for that," added Frank. "Maybe -he's going to his own cabin." - -"If he does," spoke Sammy, "we won't follow him there." - -The boys were now some distance away from Camp Mystery. They had -occasional glimpses of the frozen lake, but they had not seen any figure -bearing a likeness to Mr. Jessup, skating over it. The hunter was -probably still with his sick sister, they thought, and they did not -quite know what to do. - -"Look out for yourselves here, fellows," said Sammy, as they came out -into an opening in the woods. - -"What's the matter--did you see the hermit?" asked Frank. - -"No, but there's a big cliff here, and we might slip over." - -"Let's have a look," suggested Bob, pressing forward with Frank to where -Sammy stood on the edge of a cliff which was about ten feet high, going -down steeply into a little valley. - -Suddenly, as the boys were looking over into a big drift of snow below -them, they heard a noise behind them. There was a rush of feet, and -Maybe, the dog, barked furiously. Then the harsh voice of the hermit -cried: - -"Follow me, will you? I'll teach you to do that! You'll be sorry you -ever tried to find out my secret!" - -Before the boys could defend themselves, or make a stand, the furious -old man rushed at them. With extended hands he pushed Bob over the cliff -into the deep bank of snow below. - -"Look out!" yelled Frank, as he saw his chum disappear. - -"Hey! What are you doing that for?" demanded Sammy. - -"I'll show you! I'll teach you to follow me!" snarled the old hermit. -"Down you go! All of you!" - -He pushed Frank over the cliff also, the boy struggling to keep his -balance. But over he went, head first. - -[Illustration: He pushed Frank over the cliff also.] - -"Don't you dare touch me!" cried Sammy, getting ready to defend himself. -Yet he knew he could do nothing against the angry hermit. - -"I'll fix you!" cried the old man. - -"You let me alone!" pleaded Sammy. "Sic him, Maybe!" he cried, to the -dog. - -Indeed the hunter's dog needed no urging. At the first sign of the old -man Maybe had rushed at him. Now he was tugging at his coat-tails as -though to stop him from pushing the boys over the cliff. But the man was -strong, and paid no attention to the dog, dragging him along over the -slippery snow. - -"There you go!" cried Mr. Addison, and with that he shoved Sammy down -into the big snowdrift. - -"There!" muttered the hermit, with a hard smile on his wrinkled face. -"Now I guess them boys won't find out my secret!" - -And he walked away into the woods, the dog barking after him. - -As for the Fairview boys, they were more frightened than hurt. True, -they had been pushed down some distance, but they fell into a soft bank -of snow, and, except that it got down their necks, and up their sleeves, -as well as into their boots, they were in no danger. It was like falling -into a feather bed. - -"Whew! What happened?" gasped Bob, floundering about. - -"I guess we happened--or it happened to us!" said Frank. "Where's -Sammy?" - -"Here I am," cried that small hero. "He pushed me, too." - -"Say, he ought to be arrested!" exclaimed Bob, angrily, as he flopped -about in the snow. "What did he do it for?" - -"Said we were following him," answered Frank, as he wiped the snow out -of his face. - -"Well, I guess we were, all right," admitted Sammy. "But he had no right -to be so mean." - -"Where did he go?" Frank wanted to know. - -"I--I didn't stop to look," admitted Sammy. "It all happened too quick -for me." - -"Same here," laughed Bob. "Now I wonder if we can get out of here?" - -It was not as easy as it seemed at first, for the little valley into -which the boys had been pushed by the angry hermit was filled with snow, -and they sank in it above their waists. - -But they floundered on, and were slowly making their way out. They were -getting quite tired, however, and might have sunk down in the snow, and -have taken severe colds, had their struggle lasted too long. - -Suddenly Bob cried out. - -"Hark!" he called. - -"It's a dog barking," said Sammy. - -"Yes, and it sounds like Maybe," added Frank. - -"See, there he is!" cried Sammy, "and he's got someone with him!" - -"It's Mr. Jessup! Hurray, now we're all right!" yelled Bob, with -delight. "Now we'll show that hermit what's what!" - - - - -CHAPTER XIII - -HELPING THE HERMIT - - -Mr. Jessup, with his dog floundering in the snow ahead of him, came -toward the boys, who were still stuck in the snowbank, though slowly -getting out of it. - -"What's the matter?" cried the hunter. "What happened to you? You ought -not to go in a place like that!" - -"We couldn't help it!" exclaimed Sammy, with a laugh. "We were pushed -in!" - -"Pushed in?" exclaimed Mr. Jessup. "What in the world do you mean, -Sammy?" - -"Help us out, and we'll tell you," suggested Frank. "We're tired out -trying to wade through the deep snow." - -"I guess that's right," admitted Mr. Jessup. "I had better be helping -you instead of talking. Come on, Maybe!" - -With big strides the hunter came on. To him the drift gave little -trouble, though for the small boys it was all they could do to wade -through. But now they had help. - -Mr. Jessup had a pair of snow-shoes strapped to his back, though the -crust was not thick enough to allow him to use them. They would come in -useful as snow shovels, though, and he at once took them for that -purpose. - -"Here you go!" he cried to Bob, who was nearest him. "Catch one of these -shoes and help dig a path. I'll dig one to meet with yours, and when you -get out here, where the snow isn't so deep, you'll be all right." - -"Hurray!" cried Sammy, glad that everything was more pleasant now. - -"Is your sister better?" asked Frank, while Bob used the snow-shoe as a -shovel, the hunter doing the same with the one he had. - -"Yes, much better," was the answer. "I was sorry I had to stay away all -night, and I kept thinking, up to the last minute, that I could get off -and come back to you. That's why I didn't send anyone to keep you -company. - -"And finally, when my sister was well enough for me to leave her in the -care of some neighbors, it was too late to start for Pine Island. But I -made up my mind that you boys would be all right, and I didn't worry. -You were all right, weren't you, except for what happened to you just -now?" - -"Yes," said Sammy, eager to tell the story of the mysterious hidden -room, and the strange things in it, "yes, we're all right. Nothing -happened during the night, and we got along fine. Maybe was good -company." - -"I thought he'd be, and that's why I made him stay when I was called -away," said the hunter. "But he did want to come with me." - -While the boys and Mr. Jessup were talking he and Bob used the -snow-shoes as shovels, so that, in a few minutes, the boys were out of -the drift, and on level ground where the snow was only up to their -knees. - -"Now then," said Mr. Jessup, with a grin, as he looked at them, "I'm -ready to hear your story. How did it all happen, and who pushed you into -the drift?" - -"The hermit!" cried the three boys at once. - -"What! You don't mean Mr. Addison?" asked the hunter, in surprise. - -"That's who it was," said Frank. - -"Well, why did he do such a thing as that?" asked Mr. Jessup, in -surprise. "I've known him for sometime, and, except that he was a bit -odd now and then, he never acted that way. I always thought him quite -gentle, except that he would order people away from his cabin. Did you -do anything to him?" - -For a moment the boys did not answer, and then Sammy, knowing that it -was best to tell everything, said: - -"Well, we followed him, that was all. We wanted to see if he was going -to the big house." - -"You followed him; that was all?" - -"Yes, sir." - -"And what did he do?" - -"Well, he got out of sight, and we were trailing him," explained Bob. -"Then we came to that cliff and we were looking over, down into the pile -of snow, when, all of a sudden----" - -"He rushed out on us from the bushes," continued Frank, "and he----" - -"Pushed us down, one after the other," said Sammy, taking up the story. -"And he said he'd teach us to follow him and try to find out his -secret." - -"Hum, he said that; did he?" mused Mr. Jessup. "Well, I'm afraid he must -be out of his mind. I've been thinking that for some time, and now I'm -sure of it. He must be crazy, or he wouldn't do such a thing as that. He -must have been quite angry at you, and it's lucky he did nothing worse -than shove you into a snowbank. - -"Now I advise you boys not to go near him again. If you see him as you -walk about the island, don't notice or speak to him. That will be the -safest way. So you followed him, and he thought you were after his -secret; eh? He hasn't any secret, as far as I know. Poor old man, he -certainly must be crazy. I'm sorry for him. But, boys, did you have any -special object in following him?" - -Again the three chums looked one at the other. - -"You'd better tell, Sammy," said Frank, at last, "you made the find, -you know." - -"What's this?" asked Mr. Jessup, in some surprise. "Have you boys a -secret, too?" and he looked curiously at them, while Maybe frisked -about, barking and unable to understand why his master would not take -after a rabbit he had driven from its burrow. - -"Yes, we did find something strange in the old house," said Sammy. "We -discovered a secret room, and in it is an outfit of counterfeiters, Mr. -Jessup!" - -"And they shot at us!" cried Bob. - -"And you ought to have seen the smoke!" added Frank. - -The hunter looked from one to another of the boys, as if unable to -understand what they were saying. He might have thought they were -playing a joke on him, but their faces were too serious for that. - -"Secret room!" he murmured. "Counterfeiters! They shot at you!" - -"Yes, and we thought the hermit might be the counterfeiter, so we were -following him to see if he went to the old house," said Bob. - -"Whew! This is getting worse and worse!" exclaimed the hunter. "I guess -you'd better begin at the beginning, boys, and tell me all there is to -tell. Old Mr. Addison a counterfeiter! I can't believe it." - -"This is the way it was," began Sammy, and then he told of the -exploration of the old house, after the hunt of the day before, and how, -most unexpectedly, he had pressed on the spring that opened the panel or -door of the secret room. - -"And you should see the things in it!" put in Bob, as by turns the boys -described the queer instruments. - -"And then that flash and boom!" cried Frank. "It was terrible!" - -"It must have been," admitted the hunter. "But I own up that I am -puzzled. I never knew there was a secret room in the old house, and I -thought I'd been all over it. As for those things you tell about--well, -I guess I'll have to look at 'em myself." - -Mr. Jessup did not say so, but the truth of the matter was that the boys -had talked so fast and so excitedly, and had interrupted each other so -often, that they had not given a very clear account of the things they -had seen. Then, too, as is the case not only with boys, but with -grown-ups, no one ever sees the same thing the way another person would. - -The boys gave as good descriptions as they could of the queer objects in -the secret room, but each one put in something a little different, until -it was no wonder that Mr. Jessup was puzzled. - -"Now I'll tell you what," he said. "We'll go back to Camp Mystery and -figure this thing out. I guess I didn't name it out of the way when I -called it 'Mystery,' for it's more mysterious than ever now. - -"But we'll get to the bottom of it sooner or later. I'll have a look at -the things in that room. Maybe I can find out who has been taking my -grub. You weren't troubled while I was away last night! were you?" - -"No," answered Sammy, "nothing happened. We slept fine." - -"I thought you would be all right," went on the hunter. "I came skating -over to the island a little while ago, and went right to my cabin. You -weren't there, but pretty soon in came Maybe, and he acted so strange -that I was afraid something had happened to you. He pulled at my coat, -and would run on a little way, and then stop and bark, just as if he was -telling me to follow him, and he really was, as it happened." - -"He must have gone for help for us!" cried Frank. - -"That's what he did," replied the hunter. "He led me right here, and I -can tell you I was a bit scared when I saw you floundering in the snow. -I'm glad you're all right." - -"Sure we're all right!" cried Sammy, "and I'd like to go to the old -house right away, and find out what all those things mean. If that is a -counterfeiting den we can have the men arrested; can't we?" he asked. - -Mr. Jessup laughed. - -"Well, Sammy," he said, "of course if there are counterfeiters here they -ought to be taken in, I s'pose. But I never heard of any, and there's -been no bad money circulating around Pine Island or Fairview, as far as -I know." - -"I told him they weren't counterfeiting things," said Frank. - -"You just wait!" exclaimed Sammy, mysteriously. He was sure his find was -going to turn out big this time. - -"Well, we'd better get back to the cabin and prepare to look into this -thing," suggested the hunter. "I want to think it over a bit. By the -way, was there any sign of anybody having been in that room lately?" - -"You couldn't tell--the bed looked as if it had been slept in," said -Bob. "But there must have been someone hiding there, or else how could -he have shot at us?" - -Mr. Jessup shook his head. - -"I'll admit it's a puzzle, so far," he said. "But after I see it I may -be able to explain it all. Come along." - -They headed back for the cabin, the boys talking on the way of the many -things that had happened since coming to Pine Island. Mr. Jessup said he -had heard no special news in Fairview. He had not sent any word to the -parents of the three chums, fearing they would worry about the boys -staying alone all night. - -"And it turned out better that I did not," he said. - -They were nearing the cabin of Camp Mystery, and Mr. Jessup was -pointing out to the boys a trail that led from his place to the cabin of -the hermit. - -"But I wouldn't advise you to follow that trail after dark, unless you -know it pretty well," he said. - -"Why not?" asked Bob, always looking for reasons. - -"Because that bog, that I told you about, is on both sides of the trail -at certain places, and it's dangerous. I often wonder why old Mr. -Addison built his cabin so near the bog. It's true there are some good -springs of water near it, but I'd rather be on higher ground, and carry -my water a way. So don't travel that trail except in daylight, boys." - -They promised to be careful, and walked on, looking curiously back -toward the dangerous bog. - -Suddenly Frank, who was in the lead, raised a hand to order a halt and -silence. - -"What's up?" asked Sammy. - -"Listen!" said Frank. - -All heard a deep groan. - -"Someone's there!" exclaimed Bob, pointing to a clump of bushes just -ahead, and to one side of the trail. - -"Maybe it's a--bear!" faltered Sammy. - -"Nonsense!" exclaimed Mr. Jessup. "That's a human voice. Hello, there!" -he cried. "Who are you? What do you want? Has anything happened? -Answer!" - -"Maybe it's the counterfeiters," whispered Sammy. - -The dog was barking excitedly. - -"Come here!" commanded Mr. Jessup, and then, as the groan sounded again, -he went forward. Parting the bushes he looked ahead and cried out: - -"Boys, it's Mr. Addison--the hermit, and he seems to have fallen and -hurt himself! Come here and we'll help him!" - -The three rushed forward. There on the ground, under the bushes, where -there was no snow, lay the old man. He seemed to be unconscious and it -was his queer breathing that made the groaning sound. - -"Boys, see if you can't get him out of there, into a more comfortable -place," said Mr. Jessup. "I'll run to the cabin for a folding stretcher -I have, and I'll also get some medicine. See if you can get him out. -I'll be back in a few minutes." - - - - -CHAPTER XIV - -THE BOILING SPRING - - -Mr. Addison was a full-grown man, but he was quite old, and not very -heavy. In fact he was so light that the three sturdy boy chums easily -carried him out from under the bushes to a cleared place along the path. -The hermit only moaned as he was moved, and remained unconscious. - -"Let us take off our coats, fellows," suggested Sammy. "We'll spread -them out on the snow, and make a bed for him." - -The day was quite warm, so the boys would not be likely to take cold -from removing their coats, and soon they had made a more comfortable -place for the aged man than the bare ground on which he had fallen. - -"I wonder what could have happened to him?" said Bob. - -"He must have fallen, and hurt himself," spoke Frank. "But neither his -arms or legs are broken, as far as I can tell." - -"I guess it's his head," remarked Sammy. "Probably that's what makes him -senseless. I wish Mr. Jessup would hurry back." - -"And to think that a little while ago he pushed us into a snowbank!" -murmured Bob. "He couldn't do it now." - -"No," said Sammy, softly. "Poor old man! I guess he's had lots of -trouble." - -Indeed, as the aged hermit lay there on the boys' coats, which they had -partly folded over him, his face showed many wrinkles of care and -suffering, as well as of age. Truly, he did not seem to have had a very -happy life, and in their hearts the boys easily forgave him for what he -had done to them. - -"Here I am!" exclaimed Mr. Jessup, as, followed by his dog, he came up -the path. Over his shoulder he carried a folding stretcher, consisting -of two poles with a broad canvass piece in between. On this the hermit -could be placed, and, by means of the handles, he could be easily -carried. - -"I'll give him a little spirits of ammonia first," said the hunter. -"That is good when a person has fainted. Then we can decide what next to -do. It may be that we'll need a doctor." - -He mixed some of the ammonia in a glass, with a little water, and -managed to get some between the lips of the old hermit. But it did -little good. The aged man only moaned feebly and did not open his eyes. - -"I guess we'd better carry him to his cabin," said Mr. Jessup, after a -few minutes. "It's farther than it is to Camp Mystery, but if he wakes -up, and sees himself in a strange place, it may have a bad effect on -him. We can easily carry him to his own cabin." - -This they did, the hunter taking one end of the stretcher, and two boys -taking turns at the other end. In this way they were soon at the place -where the hermit lived. - -The cabin was rough enough on the outside, but the interior was clean, -and nicely arranged. The poor old man lived very simply. He was placed -on his bunk, and then Mr. Jessup, who knew a little about medicine, -tried to bring him to his senses. - -It seemed to be of no use, however, and finally the hunter said: - -"Boys, I think I'd better skate over to the mainland, and bring back a -doctor. I wouldn't like poor Mr. Addison to die. You're not afraid to -stay here with him; are you? I'll leave Maybe with you." - -"Afraid? Of course not!" cried Sammy. It was broad daylight. Why should -they be afraid? - -True, the mysterious old mansion was not far away, and the strange -things in the secret room had not been explained. But the boys made up -their minds they would not be alarmed. - -"I'll come back as soon as I can," said Mr. Jessup. "If he wakes up you -might give him a drink of water. Or you could make coffee. You know how, -and I see he has the things here. Yes, a good strong cup of coffee might -help him. Now don't worry. Maybe, you're to stay with the boys." - -The dog whined, and evidently wanted to go with his master, but he -obeyed well, and, with a bark of protest, he lay down on the cabin -floor. - -Mr. Jessup, who had his skates with him, started for the lake, intending -to skate to the mainland after a physician. He could come back with the -doctor in a cutter, for the ice was thick enough to bear the weight of a -horse. - -Left to themselves, the boys sat in the cabin with the old, unconscious -man. He breathed heavily but did not open his eyes. Once in a while he -groaned. - -"I wonder if we hadn't better make the coffee," suggested Bob, after a -bit. "If he could take some of that he might feel much better." - -"Good idea," said Sammy. "Let's start a fire. It's cold in here, -anyhow." - -There was a stove and an open fireplace, the latter in the other room of -the cabin. Some logs were set aglow on the hearth, and a roaring blaze -kindled in the stove. The kettle was put on, and soon a fragrant pot of -coffee was ready. - -[Illustration: The kettle was put on.] - -The boys were talking over whether they had better not try to get some -of the hot beverage between the set lips of the aged man, when there -came a sudden knock on the cabin door. - -"Who's that?" whispered Frank, startled. - -"It can't be Mr. Jessup, back already," remarked Bob. - -"No, he'd walk right in," said Sammy. - -The knock was repeated. - -"See who it is," spoke Bob. - -"I'll go," said Sammy, and he went to the door. - -He saw a young man standing there--a young man he had never seen before, -as far as he knew. The stranger's face was a pleasant one, and he smiled -at the boy. - -"Well," said the visitor, "I don't know you, and it's rather odd to see -Mr. Addison having company. Is he in?" - -"Yes," said Sammy, "but he's hurt." He noticed that the caller had a -pair of skates in his hand, showing how he had reached the island. - -"Hurt!" exclaimed the young man. "And just when I come to bring him good -news! Let me see him, please." - -He quickly entered the cabin, and bent over the form of the hermit on -the bunk. The boys looked on in wonder. Who could this stranger be? - -The young man seemed to know something about the duties of a doctor, for -he rapidly felt about the aged man, for signs of broken bones, and then, -finding none, passed his hand over the sufferer's head. - -"Ah, there's the trouble," he said. "He's had a bad knock there, but it -doesn't seem to be serious. I think he'll soon come around. You have -coffee?" and he sniffed the air. - -"Good and hot!" answered Sammy. - -"Let me have some," suggested the young man, and some was given him in a -cup. Holding the aged man up in one arm, the young man managed to get -some of the hot coffee down his throat. It did good at once, for Mr. -Addison opened his eyes, looked strangely about him, gazed in seeming -wonder at the boys, and then looked at the young man who was supporting -him. - -"It's all right, Uncle Frank," said the stranger. "You're all right. You -had a little fall, and these boys must have brought you here. But you're -not hurt to speak of, and I bring you good news." - -"Good--good news," faltered the old man. "You bring me good news, Ed?" - -"Yes, the very best. The land is now yours. I have here all the papers. -You don't need to live here any longer to claim it. You can come home -with me. I have the deeds to the land." - -"And the spring--the boiling spring--is the medical spring mine?" gasped -Mr. Addison. He seemed to be getting better very quickly. - -"The boiling spring is yours," the young man assured him. "Now take it -easy--everything is all right." - -"Oh, I am so glad--so glad!" murmured the old man, sinking back on the -bunk. "Now I won't have to worry about anyone taking my secret away from -me. Oh, everything is all right now," and he sighed in contentment. - -"Take a little more coffee," urged the young man whom the hermit had -called Ed. "It will do you good." - -It really seemed to, for soon the aged man was able to sit up again. - -He looked at the boys strangely, and they did not know what to do or -say. They wondered if the hermit would try to drive them away. - -"Are--are you the boys I pushed over the cliff?" he asked. - -"Yes," replied Sammy, and he wondered how the old man could explain his -queer action. - -"Well, I--I'm sorry I did it," went on the hermit. "You see I was a bit -excited. I thought you were following me, trying to steal my secret. But -you can't get it now. I own the land. You have the papers--the deed, -Ed?" he asked eagerly. - -"Yes, Uncle Frank, here they are," and the stranger gave a bundle of -documents to the old man, who eagerly looked them over. - -"Yes--yes," he said. "It's all right. I have a clear title to the -boiling spring. And now I'll explain. But in the first place, how did I -get here? I seem to remember falling down----" - -He paused for an answer. - -"You did fall," said Sammy. "Mr. Jessup and we boys found you under the -bushes, and we carried you here. He has gone for the doctor." - -"Hum, yes. That's very good of him--and you, especially after the way I -treated you. But I hardly knew what I was doing. But I don't believe I -need a doctor. I'm all right." - -He really seemed so, and was able now to walk slowly about the cabin. - -"I remember what happened," he went on. "I was going down to the shore -to see if you were coming, Ed, for you had promised to be here to-day, -when I slipped and fell. I must have struck my head on a stone, for it -all got dark, and I didn't remember anything else until I saw you giving -me coffee. All the rest is a blank." - -"Well, you're all right now, Uncle Frank," was the answer. "I suppose -I'd better tell you who I am," the newcomer went on to the boys. "My -name is Edward Houghton, and Mr. Addison is my uncle. I have been doing -some legal business for him for some time, and now it is all finished." - -"And the medical boiling spring is my property!" cried the hermit. - -"Yes, it is your property," said his nephew. - -"And you and I will get rich!" the old man cried, enthusiastically. - -"I hope so," spoke Mr. Houghton. "You certainly have suffered very much -to get your rights. But it is all over now." - -The boys were quite puzzled by this talk, but it was soon to be -explained. There was the jingle of sleigh bells from the direction of -the lake, and soon was heard the approach of footsteps. - -"It's Mr. Jessup!" cried Sammy. And so it proved. He had brought the -doctor back with him in a cutter. - -"I'm much obliged to you, Mr. Jessup," said the old hermit, "but I don't -believe I need the doctor's services." - -"However, as long as he's here, better let him look you over," suggested -Mr. Houghton. - -The medical man said, beyond a hard blow on the head, which had made him -unconscious for a time, Mr. Addison was not hurt. - -"I'd stand another blow on the head for the sake of my fine spring," -said the hermit, and he laughed. - -He really seemed quite a different man now. His face was kinder, and the -boys were no longer afraid of him. - -"I guess you'll have to explain," suggested Mr. Jessup. "What is it all -about, and what do you mean by your boiling spring, Mr. Addison?" - -"Come with me, and I'll show you," said the hermit. - -With slow steps he led the way to a little glade, not far from his -cabin. There the boys saw a strange sight. In spite of the fact that it -was Winter, and that snow was on the ground, there was a spot of green -grass and ferns to be seen, surrounding a boiling and bubbling spring of -clear water. And from the water a little cloud of steam arose. - -"There she is!" cried Mr. Addison. "There's my boiling spring, and the -waters of it are the best thing in the world for rheumatism. I know, -for I've cured myself, and cured others. I discovered the spring by -accident, and I worked hard to get title to the land it's on. Now I have -it, and I'm going to bottle those waters and sell 'em. I'm going to be -rich! I'm not going to be a hermit any longer," and he seemed ten years -younger. - - - - -CHAPTER XV - -THE END OF CAMP MYSTERY - - -"Well," said Mr. Jessup slowly, "this may be all clear to you and your -nephew, Mr. Addison, but it's like Greek to me. If you wouldn't mind -explaining----" - -"Of course I'll explain," said Mr. Addison eagerly. Sammy hoped -something would be said to clear up the mystery of the strange room in -the old mansion. - -"First of all," said the hermit, "I want to tell you boys how sorry I am -that I pushed you into the snow. I was all excited when I saw you -following me, and I really didn't know what I was doing. You see I had -been expecting my nephew for some time, and when he didn't come I was -afraid something had happened so that I couldn't get the spring I had -tried so hard for. So first I want to beg your pardon." - -"Oh, that's all right," said Sammy, easily. "It was as much our fault as -it was yours. We had no right to follow you, and really we weren't hurt -a bit." - -"I'm glad of it," said the old man. "Well, to begin at the beginning. -Some months ago, when I was walking over this island, I found this -boiling spring. It was in a place few people would visit, and I guess -that's why it was never talked of before. For a good many years I have -had the rheumatism, and I've tried all sorts of cures. Just by accident -I thought of trying this spring water, as I could easily tell that it -had some sort of medicine in it. - -"I took some home, and in a few days after taking it I felt better. -Then I made more tests, and I was sure I had found a cure for some of -the worst kinds of rheumatism. Then I decided to try to get possession -of the land on which the spring was. - -"This was not easy, as the title was in dispute. But I got my nephew to -help me. In order that no one else would claim the spring, I decided to -put up a cabin near it, and live on the land until I could buy it. This -I did, and I became a sort of hermit. I was so afraid someone would -discover the secret of the spring that I drove away anyone who came -near. In that way I suppose folks began to think I was crazy, and a sort -of crank. - -"But I did not care. I wanted to get title to that spring, for I knew I -could sell the waters and get rich. And now I can. My nephew has brought -me the final papers, and the spring is mine. I am going to form a -company, and bottle the boiling water. Of course it won't stay hot, but -it will be just as good, for it can be heated before being swallowed. - -"So I'm no longer the hermit of Pine Island. I'm going back where I -belong, and I'll let others do the work. And I'll say this, Mr. Jessup, -if ever you get the rheumatism you can have free all the water from my -mineral spring that you want." - -"Thank you!" said Mr. Jessup, with a laugh, "but I hope I'll never have -the rheumatism. But if I do I'll use your spring water." - -"I had a hard time getting the final papers," said Mr. Houghton, "and -that's what took me so long. But now, Uncle, the boiling spring is -yours, and you needn't worry any more." - -"How can it be hot water in the Winter time?" asked Bob. - -"Well, that's one of the mysteries of Nature," said the former hermit. -"I suppose the waters must come from deep down in the earth, and the -wise men tell us that inside the earth are raging fires. I don't know -about that, but I do know my medical spring will cure rheumatism. And I -guess now, everything is explained." - -"No, not everything," said Sammy quickly. - -"Eh?" asked the old man. - -"We found a secret room in the old mansion," went on Sammy, "and it's a -counterfeiters' den, I'm sure. We thought you were going there, Mr. -Addison, that's why we followed you. - -"And while we were in there," Sammy went on, "there was an explosion. We -thought someone was shooting at us, and we ran out. That has to be -explained yet." - -"That's so!" exclaimed Mr. Jessup. "I've got to look into that." - -Mr. Houghton laughed. - -"It won't take much of an explanation to do away with that mystery," he -said. "If you'll come with me I'll show you all about it. I fancy you -stumbled across one of my fads. Will you come, Uncle Frank?" - -"No, I'll go back to my cabin," was the hermit's answer. "I'm going to -pack up and go back to the mainland to live, now that my medical spring -is safe." - -"Then the rest of us will go," suggested the young man. - -They left the little glade where the hot spring made grass grow in the -middle of Winter, and soon reached the hermit's cabin again. He went in -there, while Sammy and his chums, with Mr. Jessup and Mr. Houghton, kept -on to the deserted mansion, telling the hermit they would soon be back -to look after him. The doctor, whom Mr. Jessup had brought, had gone -back to the mainland in his cutter. - -"Shall we go right in?" asked Sammy, when Mr. Houghton and the others -reached the old house, and prepared to enter. - -"Of course--why not?" inquired the young man, with a smile. - -"Well, I was thinking that the counterfeiters----" - -Mr. Houghton laughed. - -"I'll explain all that," he said. - -The place of the secret room was soon reached. It was just as when Sammy -and his chums had rushed away from it after the explosion that had so -frightened them. The sliding door was still wedged back with the piece -of shutter. - -Mr. Houghton went over to the table on which was piled the strange -apparatus. He moved some of the wires and springs. - -"Look out!" cried Sammy. "You may get shot!" - -"No danger!" laughed the young man. "I fancy you boys set off the -flashlight, and there isn't another." - -"Flashlight!" cried Sammy. - -"Yes, that was what made the smoke and explosion," said Mr. Houghton. -"You touched the spring that worked the electric battery, and the -current set off some flashlight powder in a box. It did make quite an -explosion, I fancy." - -"But what was flashlight powder doing up here?" asked Mr. Jessup. - -"I was trying to get some night photographs of bats," explained Mr. -Houghton. "You see all this apparatus is just some photographic cameras, -set to work automatically. I fancy I have the pictures of you boys on -the plate, instead of the bats," and he smiled at the three chums. - -"Photographs!" cried Sammy. - -"Cameras!" exclaimed Bob. - -"Aren't these things telescopes?" asked Frank. - -"And isn't there any counterfeiting plant?" Sammy wanted to know. - -"Nothing half as sensational as that," answered Mr. Houghton, with a -hearty laugh. "This is only my new apparatus for having animals take -their own pictures." - -For a moment there was silence, and then Sammy, in a queer sort of -voice, murmured: - -"Stung again!" - -All his mystery had vanished into thin air. - -"Make animals take their own photographs; eh?" said Mr. Jessup. "That's -rather odd." - -"Oh, it is often done," said Mr. Houghton. "All you have to do is to set -your camera in the woods after dark, near where you have noticed marks -of a raccoon, muskrat or other wild animal. You put a string across the -path the animal usually takes, and in the dark it runs into the string -and breaks it. This sets off a flashlight which makes the place as light -as day. The breaking of the string also opens and closes the shutters of -the camera, and so the animal takes its own picture. I've been doing it -for some time, and had good results. I left my cameras, flashlights, -batteries and so on here, in the hope of getting pictures of bats, but I -guess I'll have to try again." - -"So that's what it was that exploded," said Sammy--"flashlight powder?" - -"That was it," said Mr. Houghton. "You see I happened to discover this -secret room by accident. I was going through the old mansion one day, -thinking it would be a good place to get bat pictures, and I found the -secret chamber. So I fitted it up as a room where I could sleep when I -had to. Often I would take my cameras out in the woods and leave them -there until nearly morning. Then I would get up and go bring them in. I -did not want to disturb my uncle so I stayed here. I fancy the secret -room must have been built by the man who put up the old mansion, for his -own use." - -"I think so," agreed Mr. Jessup. "He was a queer character anyhow. And -to think I've been in and out of the old place so much, and never found -the secret room!" - -"It was pretty well hidden," said Mr. Houghton. "Well, I don't imagine -I'll use it any more. I'll try for bat pictures somewhere else. Besides, -if my uncle's mineral spring turns out as well as he thinks it will, -this place may become a Summer resort, and the old mansion could be made -into a hotel for people who want to take the rheumatism cure." - -"But there's one thing I don't understand," said Mr. Jessup, "and that -is who took my grub." - -"I think I can explain that, too," spoke Mr. Houghton. "I had hired a -young man to assist me, in my photographic work, but when I found out he -was not honest I discharged him. I saw him come along one day with a -strip of bacon, and a long pole with a hook on the end. He said he had -hooked the bacon." - -"And so he had!" cried Mr. Jessup. "That was one of the pieces I -missed." - -"The fellow must have stood some distance away from your cabin, and -caught the string of the bacon in the hook on the pole," said the -photographer. "That's why you never saw any footmarks." - -"Then this is the end of Camp Mystery," said Sammy, faintly. - -"That's right!" cried Frank. "I told you there weren't any -counterfeiters." - -"Well, there might have been," returned Sammy. - -And he wondered why the others laughed. - -But it was really the end of Camp Mystery. The hermit's secret had been -the warm, medical spring, and now that he had full title to it he need -not worry any more, nor drive away those whom he thought might try to -cheat him out of the property. - -Mr. Houghton had explained the queer machines in the secret room, and -had told how he used to photograph wild animals at night. A few days -afterward he showed the boys how he set the cameras in the wood, with a -string which the animals themselves would break, thus setting off the -flashlight and taking their own picture. - -Mr. Jessup made some inquiries, and found out that the secret room in -the old mansion had been built by the former owner of it. He had no -particular use for it, but it was just a notion on his part to have it -made. Mr. Houghton had accidentally discovered it, just as Sammy had -done. - -As for the young man who had taken things from Mr. Jessup's camp, he was -not heard of again. After all, he had not taken a great deal, and his -plan of using a long pole with a hook on it explained why he had never -left any marks. He could reach in the window or door of the cabin when -Mr. Jessup was away, and get what he wanted. He had been in the habit of -staying in the secret room when Mr. Houghton did not sleep there. - -"Well, as long as everything is explained, we may as well go back to -camp," said Sammy, when they left the old mansion. - -"Yes, I guess so," agreed Mr. Jessup. "You boys are entitled to some fun -after your hard work." - -"Yes, and they're entitled to more than that," said Mr. Addison, a -little later. "I owe them something for helping take care of me," and -some time afterward, when the Mineral Spring Company was formed, he sent -each of the boys a nice present. - -"Well, now we'll take it easy," suggested Sammy, when they got back to -the hunter's cabin, late that afternoon. "We'll go skating and coasting, -and----" - -"Fishing through the ice," added Mr. Jessup. "I've had that in mind for -you for some time." - -"Say, this trip to Camp Mystery is all right!" cried Frank, with a -laugh. "I wonder if we'll have as much fun as this next Winter?" - -"More I hope," said Sammy. "But Summer will come before Winter." - -And what the chums did the following Summer may be learned by reading -the next volume of this series, to be called "Fairview Boys at -Lighthouse Cove; Or, Carried Out to Sea." In that we will meet all our -young friends again. - -In the days that followed Sammy and his chums had many good times. They -roved about the island with Mr. Jessup and watched him at his hunting. -They had many good meals, too. Mr. Addison left Pine Island, now that he -had possession of the spring, and one of the members of the company he -had formed took up a residence in the cabin. But there was no further -trouble. The mystery had been solved. - -"Come on for a skate!" cried Bob, one afternoon. "We only have a few -more days here." - -"That's right--and then school once more!" exclaimed Sammy. - -And as the Fairview Boys are starting off on the glittering ice, we will -take leave of them. - - - -***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK FAIRVIEW BOYS AT CAMP MYSTERY*** - - -******* This file should be named 52130.txt or 52130.zip ******* - - -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: -http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/5/2/1/3/52130 - - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - diff --git a/old/52130.zip b/old/52130.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b68deb6..0000000 --- a/old/52130.zip +++ /dev/null |
